Home

Lenovo 36984MU Laptop User Manual

1. Pisin Paper Leter 85x11 215 9279 40m 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed so that it looks hand drawn Page top Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 316 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Representing Image Data with a Single Color P022 Representing Image Data with a Single Color This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used With the Monochrome Effects function you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a photograph to a sepia tone image The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Monochrome Effects Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color When you use Select Color move the Color slider to specify the color you want The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver DR Ock Setup lt gt Man B Page Setup of Elects B Martensnce Pan Paper Leter 85 11 215 3279 40m 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with a single color Representing Image Data with a Single Color Page 317 of 468 pages P important When the Grayscale Printing check bo
2. Sze From Left of Page 159 5 mn Width g 4204 mm From Top of Page 63 2 mm Height e20 mm Select the Show comment box checkbox Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display and enter comments Set the size and color of font and position of the comments etc then click OK EE Note See Help for details on comments Page top Page 240 of 468 pages Adding Text to Photos Page 241 of 468 pages ASAA Gtitel Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Text to Photos A090 rl gt Adding Text to Photos You can add text to photos P important For PREMIUM Contents Print you cannot enter text in the following cases There is no text box in the selected layout m Al Add Text is disabled Click E Add Text in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text For PREMIUM Contents Print if you want to enter text in a preset text box select it and click Pal Edit Text Box E8 Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Tee Poston d Sze Colors amp Lines Amemoy of prae Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text then click OK EE Note Inthe Edit Text Box dialog box you can change the po
3. Executing print Click Print When you execute print the printer uses the specified settings to print the data Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 445 of 468 pages Reprinting from the Print History When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting the document printed from the preview is saved and you can reprint the document with the same settings 1 Displaying the print history Select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt View Print History XPS The saved print document is displayed in the preview P important To limit the number of print history registrations click History Entry Limit on the File menu If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded the print history registrations are deleted starting from the oldest one 2 Selecting a print document From the Document Name list select the document to be printed 3 Executing print Click Print Related Topic Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page top Deleting the Undesired Print Job Page 446 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Deleting the Undesired Print Job P037 Deleting the Undesired Print Job If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information If the printer does not start printing cancelled or failed print job data may be r
4. Page top Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Page 401 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Printed Paper Has Ink Blots or Curls U316 Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots fs Printed Paper Has Ink Blots POOOOOOOO OOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOONR a Printed Paper Curls Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy causing paper abrasion You can confirm the intensity using the printer driver m Adjusting Intensity Check 3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color we recommend using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper Loading Paper Page top Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 402 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched U317 Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Paper Is Smudged The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched e
5. Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines To create a balanced composition drag any of the intersecting points white squares or white broken lines over the main subject of the photo The cropping effect applies only to the print result The original image will not be cropped See Help for details on the Crop window Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 208 of 468 pages Page top Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Page 209 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print A074 Eror Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print To print the date the photo was taken on the photo click El Date Settings in the Layout Print screen then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Page 210 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page A076 Printing Multiple Photos on One Page You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple photo layout in the Layout Pri
6. Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Changing Layout Changing Background s gt Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving Opening Saved Files Creating an Album Page 103 of 468 pages Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File s What Is C1 or C4 Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 104 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A021 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seler the Rem you want to create fom the menu Select Lorry to access saved tems Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 105 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A022 il Easy PhotoPrint EX ES Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Album from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty abun structure paper Sze etc m
7. P important Do not touch the printing surface when removing the disc from the Disc Tray E8 Note Dry the printing surface sufficiently before removing the disc If you see printing on the Disc Tray or the transparent parts on inner or outer diameter of the printable disc wipe them off after the printing surface has dried e 4 72 inches 12 cm printable disc 1 Remove the printable disc from the Disc Tray Page 339 of 468 pages Attaching Removing the Disc Tray Page 340 of 468 pages e 3 15 inches 8 cm printable disc 1 Remove the 3 15 inches 8 cm Disc Adapter from the Disc Tray 2 Remove the 3 15 inches 8 cm printable disc from the Disc Tray P important The Disc Tray cannot be used if it becomes warped Be sure to keep the Disc Tray on a flat place Page top Printing on the Disc Label Page 341 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label gt Printing on the Disc Label D002 Printing on the Disc Label The Disc Tray supplied allows the printing of images on printable discs BD DVD CD etc CD LabelPrint is bundled application software that allows you to edit and modify data before printing Install it on your computer to use it Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer EE Note We recommend that you test print on an unneeded printable disc first Page top Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer
8. Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 350 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBr U05 idge Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device 2 Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera camcorder or mobile phone connect to the printer using a USB cable recommended by the device s manufacturer and print recorded images directly without using a computer SS Note When printing photos with the PictBridge compliant device connected to the printer we recommend the use of the AC adapter supplied with the device If you are using the device battery be sure to charge it fully Depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a print mode compliant with PictBridge before connecting the device You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the printer Perform necessary operations on the PictBridge compliant device before connecting it to this printer according to instructions given in the device s instruction manual Make sure that the printer is turned on Load paper Make sure that the PictBridge compliant device is turned off Connect the PictBridge compliant
9. Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction s gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Page 314 of 468 pages Page top Simulating an Illustration Page 315 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Simulating an Illustration P021 Simulating an Illustration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used With the Simulate Illustration function you can print full color or 256 color image data so that it looks like a hand drawn illustration This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the Simulate Illustration If necessary check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab and adjust the Contrast Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the image data The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver DR ak Sep gt Man SB Page Setup of Btocts A Martenance T Smgste Busrster ail rage Optimizer Prgte Optinzer PRO Foply Throughout Page Photo Noise Reduction
10. _ Usieg te Red Eye Correction Function aaa series Advanced Gade Documents Containing Any Keyword L Reducing Photo Nome L Redzcire Photo Nome L Redacine the Printer Nome The Printer Cannot Be Powered On No Printing Results Prirting Is Bhareds C Deleting the Undesived Print Job C Operate Ge Explanation Window L Man Components Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EXD L Priming Documents L Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX _ Starting Varnus Software Appheators L Meda Types You Can Use d Replacing en ik Terk Advanced Guide Troubleshooting _ When Privting Becomes Fant or Colors Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern ary of Cleang Ge Pret Head Chanig Sa Pad n the Cassette i Ta 1 Click sess The search pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual EA Note Click 5 to close or display the search pane 2 Enter a keyword In Keyword enter a keyword for the item to be checked When you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords EA Note You can enter up to 10 search keywords or up to 255 characters Uppercase and lowercase are not distinguished The program can also search for keywords that contain spaces A convenient way of quickly finding a document to be read is to enter keywords as described below To learn how to operate a function you are using Enter the menu name displayed on the operation panel of this machine o
11. A012 Easy PhotoPrint EX amp Selecting a Photo 1 Click Photo Print from Menu The Select Images screen appears Select mages for Shots wrug To corect ae enhance mages dck the Correct Ennance Button ts Apply correctons and enhancements in the rending screen Exif Print a ee x a Gi sotbyder a owe E Lorares 6 4 Corpse Sy neok 9492031_3 Jog 1069203 jog JME AjI P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important lf Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX ZoomBrowser EX or Digital Photo Professional the folder tree area will not be displayed The images selected in the application will be displayed as thumbnails EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet s gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Selecting a Photo Page 98 of 468 pages 3 Click the image you want to print T
12. Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best staple position When you want to change the setting select from the list TR aak Senp gt Man 5B Poze Sete gf Btects Af Martenance El Page Sze Leter 85x117 H amp Oretson A Porat A Landcope Rotate 190 degrees a z Same os Page Sze Page Lagat Noensisine a EE 5 3 g CE nssonan Mean metn mepe Sed Port Ll 0O V Actoenatically reduce large document that the perter carrot output Oupley Preting Atomatic Pret Awa Setup Staple Sde Lenosie saping et Specty Maran Sons gt 1 98 1 isi i Pare orm Lact Pogo E Colste Pag Options Samp Background Oetauts Cox ca toe tte 3 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK Setting the Stapling Margin Page 258 of 468 pages EA Note The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width P important Staple Side and Specify Margin appear grayed out and are unavailable when Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected for Page Layout Scaled is selected for
13. Enter the search text EA Note Alternatively click Down arrow to display up to 20 search history records and select among them When you want to enter multiple keywords insert a space between the keywords Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 194 of 468 pages Sort by Select how to sort the search results in the Thumbnail window Select Popularity or Date You cannot change the setting after a search Number of Results per Page Select the number of images displayed in the Thumbnail window from 10 20 and 30 You cannot change the setting after a search License Type Select the license type of images to search for from All types CC license Non Commercial and CC license Others Select All types to display all images regardless of license type Select CC license Non Commercial to display CC licensed images that can be used for non commercial purposes only Select CC license Others to display other CC licensed images ES Note a License type varies by image Point to an image to display a tooltip in which you can check the license type License Type License Type Usage Precautions Conditions Comply with the following conditions when using CC licensed images except for personal use or use within the home All types All Rights Reserved Unauthorized copying of images is illegal except for personal home use or for use within such limited scope Copying portraits photographs of person
14. When Custom is selected you can set coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window Intensity Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider To lighten the background move the slider to the left To darken the background move the slider to the right To print the background at the original bitmap intensity move the slider to the rightmost position 6 Save the background Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 7 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Changing and Registering Some Background Settings 1 Select the background for which the settings are to be changed Check the Background check box in the Stamp Background dialog box and then select the title of the background you want to change from the Background list 2 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens 3 Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 285 of 468 pages 4 Save the background Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab When you want to save the background with a different title enter a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the conf
15. 4 Open Word s Print dialog box again 5 Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK 6 Start printing e If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator Adobe Systems Inc printing may take time or some data may not be printed printing may take time or some data may not be printed Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box Page top Appendix Page 438 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix Appendix Printing Area Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Deleting the Undesired Print Job s gt Interpreting the ICC Profile Updating the Printer Driver Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals gt Transporting the Printer s gt Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Sharing the Printer on a Network s gt Downloading Premium Content Page top Printing Area Page 439 of 468 pages Advanced Gttels Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area U504 Printing Area To ensure the best print quality the printer allows a margin along each edge of media The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins Recommended printing area ME Canon recommends that you print within this area Printable area EJ The area where it is possible to print However printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision E Note Borderless P
16. It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white Defaults Resets all adjustments Close Closes the Advanced Adjustment dialog box Note The Brightness and Contrast values set in Adjust do not change even if the brightness and Correct Enhance Images Window color tone are adjusted in the Advanced Adjustment dialog box Defaults Resets each adjustment brightness contrast sharpness blur and show through removal Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced adjusted image the selected one Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Correct Enhance LAA RedEye Conecton 22 Face Baghtene 22 Week am Srog Specty the area you wart to corect 92 Face Shspener oS Digtal Face Smoothing 99 Blov sh Remover roel pg sret os CAUrer User NimesamphkI3 jpg Selected 3 Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes in the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider EA Note For Photo Print red eyes are automatically corrected when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo F
17. Opening Saved Files A093 Easy PhotoPrint EX g Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu Seket the Rem you want to create from the menu Seer Lorry to access saved tems lt a KA Photo Print Abum Disc Label Calendar c gt SOS The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX in icon view only for Windows 7 Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64 bit editions of Windows 7 Windows Vista or Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Layout Print screen appears 3 Edit the file if necessary ES Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format extension Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Click Open in the step button area of each screen then select the file you want to edit Double click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Opening Saved Files Page 218 of 468 pages Page top Other Settings Page 219 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Ap
18. Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver Overview of the Printer Driver gt Printer Driver Operations Canon lJ Printer Driver m XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor s gt Canon IJ Preview Page top Printer Driver Operations Canon Printer Driver Operations MA 6953 V 1 00 Instructions for Use Printer Driver Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Execute Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Printing an Envelope Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Color
19. Registering New Background 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab DR cusck Setup E Man 33 Pose Seto gf tects Aj Martenance E Page Sze Co Hi a Oetation A Pora A Langrcope Rotse 180 degrees 3 Same os Page Size a aas Pisn Paper Leter 8 S11 215 279 4am Nomalsize Bordetess Pato Page Sealed Page Layout g w Im F Atomatcaly reduce large document that the perter carrot output Oupleg Preng Pagoenatic Prrt Area Setup Stacie Sde Lengado taping Lett Specty Magi Copes gt 01 993 ay Yy i rei Poge 7 Colste Refine Samo nd Ord pace ork Background fit page ony Coo cc C oats Hel ES Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 284 of 468 pages and Background cannot be used 3 Click Select Background The Background Settings dialog box opens Background Settings Net Saved es Background Save settings Fig Sect Fle Layout Method Fil page EE Ftensty O Defats 4 Select the image data to be registered to the background Click Select File Select the target bitmap file bmp and then click Open 5 Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window Layout Method Select how the background image data is to be placed
20. Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 106 of 468 pages 4 If you want to change the layout click Layout The Change Layout dialog box appears In the Change Layout dialog box you can change the layout or select whether to print the date on which the picture was taken on the photo EA Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation Double page album or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout dialog box and click Date Settings 5 If you want to change the background click Background The Change Background dialog box appears In the Change Background dialog box you can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 107 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Selecting a Photo A023 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select roges for abura You can abo add repace ragas atar ri the edeng process To Comect or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Aooly Corrections anc enman
21. The power is off POWER lamp lights green The printer is ready to print POWER lamp flashes green The printer is getting ready to print or printing is in progress Alarm lamp flashes orange An error has occurred and the printer is not ready to print For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide POWER lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately An error that requires contacting the service center may have occurred For details refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide m Rear View 14 14 USB Port Plug in the USB cable to connect the printer with a computer gt Important Do not touch the metal casing Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while printing 15 Rear Cover Detach to remove jammed paper 16 Power Cord Connector Plug in the supplied power cord m Inside View 17 Ink lamps Light or flash red to indicate the ink tank status See Checking the Ink Status 18 Print Head Holder Page 6 of 468 pages Main Components Page 7 of 468 pages Install the Print Head 19 Print Head Lock Lever Locks the Print Head into place gt Important Do not raise this lever after installing the Print Head Note For details on installing the Print Head and ink tanks refer to the printed manual Getting Started A Page top Printing Page 8 of 468 pages Basic Guide zl E Contents
22. There may be a little space between the Paper Guide B and the paper stack 3 Slide the Paper Guide C on the left to align completely with the side of the paper stack E9 Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark D Page 27 of 468 pages Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 28 of 468 pages 4 Set the Cover on the Cassette 5 Insert the Cassette into the printer Push the Cassette all the way into the printer E The Cassette sticks out of the printer when correctly set Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 29 of 468 pages Note Do not force the Cassette into the printer any further This can damage the printer or Cassette 4 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open Note After loading paper Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents O A Page top Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 30 of 468 pages Basic Guide a Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Rear Tray C073 m Loading Paper in the Rear Tray You can load photo paper or envelopes in the Rear Tray Loading Photo Paper gt Important If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 13 x 18 cm or 2 16 x 3 58 55 0 x 91 0 mm Card size to perform trial print it can cause paper jam
23. Tm s wt umin anti a tune vate mmn min oe unt ma D k ta ines amp amp eo a amp E8 Note m f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks E Less noticeable vertical white streaks F More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column Q then click OK 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The third pattern is printed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress 7 Look at the third printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column a that has the least noticeable horizontal streaks Page 366 of 468 pages Manual Print Head Alignment Page 367 of 468 pages 2 M S 2 o E oe om om gt mm 1 D 1 oe i x N a gt 2 2 2 es a a a om om gt ae 1 A es me E U o a E9 Note f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks G Less noticeable horizontal white streaks H More noticeable horizontal white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column j then click OK 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK Manual Print Head Alignment is complete Page top Checking the Prin
24. Troubleshooting gt If an Error Occurs U302 If an Error Occurs When an error occurs in printing such as the printer is out of paper or paper is jammed a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically Take the appropriate action described in the message The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system 1 Load paper into the cassette 2 Press the printers RESUME button Plain paper of A4 Letter B5 and AS sizes wil be fed from the cassette because Automatically Select is selected for Paper Source in the printer diver _CereetPertng _ Page top The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Page 383 of 468 pages Advanced Gmide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt The Printer Cannot Be Powered On U303 The Printer Cannot Be Powered On e Check 1 Press the ON button e Check 2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the Power Cord Connector of the printer then turn it back on e Check 3 Unplug the printer from the power supply then plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on after leaving it for at least 3 minutes If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Page 384 of 468 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange U329 Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange When a printer error occurs the Alarm lamp flashes orange as shown below The number of flashes indicates the type of error that
25. Unless the default setting has been changed Solution Menu EX starts automatically when you start up the computer To start Solution Menu EX from the Start menu select All Programs Canon Utilities Solution Menu EX then Solution Menu EX if Solution Menu EX Main Screen does not appear after starting Solution Menu EX right click 4 Accessory Icon and select Show Main Screen 2 Select the function of a software application that you want to start 1 Click the Photo Print menu 2 Click lt Photo Print Easy PhotoPrint EX will be started and the operation screen of Photo Print will appear 1 2 E9 Note In addition to photo printing functions for creating albums calendars and other photo items Starting Various Software Applications are available For details on operations and functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX see Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX m Easy WebPrint EX When Easy WebPrint EX is installed it adds a toolbar to your Internet Explorer screen The toolbar is available whenever Internet Explorer is running ee ee e wer Wasi heare ipin 5ga wiere Ae 4q e R D v fer wer toe Gr Note Installing Easy WebPrint EX If Easy WebPrint EX is not installed the guidance for installation of Easy WebPrint EX may appear in the notification area of the taskbar To install Easy WebPrint EX click the displayed guidance and follow the instructions on the screen You can al
26. When reloading the paper into the printer confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it into the printer correctly Loading Paper Insert the Cassette into the printer again and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If you turned off the printer in step 2 all print jobs in queue are canceled Reprint if necessary If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page top Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Page 422 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing U351 Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing Before removing the jammed paper see Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit to remove it from Transport Unit If the paper jam error continues remove the jammed paper following the procedure below 1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply 2 Remove the Cassette If the paper is loaded on the Rear Tray remove the paper from the Rear Tray and retract the Paper Support 3 Set the printer upright with the left side down gt Slowly pull the jammed paper out so that the paper does not tear oN N A EA Note Set the printer back to its original po
27. When you select a printing profile the Additional Features Media Type and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset TA Cusck Seno E Man SB Page Senp of Blects Af Martenance TW 20n 1 Prrtng Bordedess Prrtng sonl Prrting Groyscale Printing Duplex Prrting Fast Speed Proy Pre from Last Page Meda Type Porter Paper Sre Plan Paper Lemer 8 5511 Orertaton Porat Landscape Pert Quality Paper Source Sandor Atomaticaly Select z Copes 1 1 339 EE Aways Bort wth Curert Settings Igstrsctions Defauts 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the paper source Select Automatically Select Rear Tray Cassette Continuous Autofeed or Paper Allocation that matches your purpose for Paper Source P important The paper source settings that can be selected may differ depending on the paper type and size 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose P important When you select the Always Print with Current Settings check box all settings specified on the Printing with Easy Setup Page 252 of 468 pages Quick Setup Main Page Setup and Effects tabs are saved and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well Effects tab cannot be used when the XPS printer driver
28. and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 2 Start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu EX 1 Start Solution Menu EX See Solution Menu EX 4 Click Here Solution Menu EX 2 Click lt Photo Print in the Photo Print menu Easy PhotoPrint EX will be started and the operation screen of Photo Print will appear E9 Note Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX In addition to photo printing functions for creating albums calendars and other photo items are available See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Select a photo to print 1 Select the folder in which images are saved 2 Click the image to print The number of copies appears as 1 and the image you selected appears in the selected image area A You can select two or more images at the same time E9 Note To print two or more copies click Up arrow to change the number of copies To cancel the selection click the image to cancel in the selected image area A and click Delete Imported Image B You can also use Down arrow to change the number of copies to zero You can also correct or enhance the selected image For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide You can capture and print an image from a video See Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX 3 Click Select Paper 4 Select the loaded paper 1 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in
29. colors as a common color space For Windows a color management system called ICM is built into the operating system Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB ICC profiles convert device dependent colors into a common color space By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data The recommended printing method depends on the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data or the application software to be used There are two typical printing methods Check the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data and the application software to be used and then select the printing method suited to your purpose Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver e To print using Canon Digital Photo Color The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three dimensional effects and high sharp contrasts e To print by directly applying editing and touch up results of an application software When printing the data the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas while leaving the darkest and lightest a
30. e XPS printer driver The XPS printer driver is suited to print from an application that supports XPS printing P important To use the XPS printer driver the standard lJ printer driver must already be installed on your computer Easy PhotoPrint EX My Printer and other application software distributed with the printer do not support the XPS printer driver Installing the XPS Printer Driver Load the Setup CD ROM that comes with the printer and then select XPS Printer Driver from Custom Install to install the driver Using the XPS Printer Driver To use the XPS printer driver for printing open the Print dialog box in application you are using and select your printer name XPS O Page top How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 329 of 468 pages Nelizinesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window P409 How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing 1 Select the command that you perform printing on the application software In general select Print on the File menu to o
31. fetructons Defauts The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens Adjust intensity Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies darkens the colors Moving the slider to the left dilutes brightens the colors You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver After adjusting each color click OK Page 311 of 468 pages Adjusting Intensity Page 312 of 468 pages ABCDEF a 1234567 Boes foma i Sample Type Yew Coler Paten ii G Q P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction s gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness s gt Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Contrast Page 313 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Contrast P020 Adjusting Contrast You can adjust the image contrast during printing To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct increase
32. gt Printing This section describes the procedure to print documents or photos You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the printer Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Documents Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Starting Various Software Applications Solution Menu EX Easy WebPrint EX A Page top Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 9 of 468 pages Basic Guide Ady Contents gt Printing gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX C051 Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy PhotoPrint EX supplied with the printer This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper For details on Easy PhotoPrint EX refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Note Install Easy PhotoPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled To install Easy PhotoPrint EX select Easy PhotoPrint EX in Custom Install 1 Prepare for printing 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper Here we load 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray E9 Note Load A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently
33. gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Displaying the Print Results before Printing P009 Displaying the Print Results before Printing If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information You can display and check the print result before printing The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab j J J A 2 f i i l xj DR aak Senp D Man B Page Setup af Efecte A Martensnce Meda Type Pian Paper z Paper Source Atoan Saot Print Quality DHA Pian Paper Gatton m Leter 85x11 215 273 4mm Color rtensty Ago O hma ca Grayscale Prrtng F Preview betore parting 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the Canon IJ Preview opens and displays the print results Related Topic Canon IJ Preview Page top Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 291 of 468 pages Advanced Gttels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size P010 Setting Paper Dimension
34. mM Fic Name IMG0032_s 09 Center Position From Left of Page IEH mm From Top of Paga 81 75 mm Retation 0 04 Size Custom size Lock aspact ratio Width 1185H mm Height 730 Ea mm Standard size Set the Center Position Rotation and Size then click OK EE Note You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen Select an image in the Edit screen then click 2 Free Rotate and drag a corner of the image to rotate it Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Page 232 of 468 pages 2 For PREMIUM Contents Print you cannot use SA Free Rotate See Help for details on the position and size of images Page top Cropping Photos Page 233 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Cropping Photos A086 E Cropping Photos Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the necessary portions P important For PREMIUM Contents Print using premium content images this function may not be available depending on the selected image Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The
35. s Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 2 On the Maintenance sheet click View Printer Status 3 Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected Page top Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 430 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device U334 Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them Note This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices The error messages and operations may vary depending on the device you are using For errors on non Canon PictBridge compliant devices check the status of the Alarm lamp and take the appropriate action to clear the error For details see Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange For the errors indicated on the PictBridge compliant device and their solution also refer to the instruction manual of the device For other troubles on the device contact the manufacturer Error Message on the PictBridge Compliant Device Printer in use No paper Paper Error Paper jam Printer cover open No print head Waste tank full Ink absorber full No ink Ink cassette error Ink Error Hardware Error If the printer is printing from the compu
36. the upper left of the image EA Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shooting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected images 6 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 161 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Red Eye Correction Function A061 Using the Red Eye Correction Function You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash You can perform the Red Eye Correction function either automatically or manually E
37. 217 1654 Haight 1100 gt inches 25826 61 0K ca te 4 Set the custom paper size Specify Units and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used Then click OK 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified paper size Page top amp Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Page 293 of 468 pages AJAS Si Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Interpreting the ICC Profile Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles s gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast s gt Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines s gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Page top Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Met Page 294 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Othe
38. 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Holidays A099 Easy PhotePrint EX Setting Holidays You can add holidays to your calendar Gm Click Set Holidays in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or click Setup Period Holiday in the Edit screen and click Set Holidays in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday Settings dialog box To add a holiday click Add The Add Edit Holiday dialog box appears To edit a saved holiday select it and click Edit To delete a holiday select it and click Delete To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar period click Clear In the Add Edit Holiday dialog box that appears by clicking Add or Edit you can specify the name and date of the holiday Setting Holidays Page 245 of 468 pages Holiday Name Set as Holiday Period From 12 2010 to 2 2011 Month Year December 2010 x Day om fas Day of week First Sunday v ok cane hep Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar EE Note See Help for details on each dialog box Page top Setting Calendar Display Page 246 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled A
39. 468 pages Aeilese Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose P008 Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose In this printer there are two paper sources a rear tray and a cassette You can facilitate printing by selecting a paper source setting that matches your print conditions or purpose The procedure for setting paper source is as follows You can also set the paper source on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper source From the Paper Source list on the Main tab select the paper source that matches your purpose DR ak Setup Man E Page Setup of Efecte A Martenance Pian Paper Leter 85 11 215 S279 40m Color rtensty Ago m Geayscale Prreng Preview before parting Automatically Select Plain paper whose Page Size is Letter 8 5 x11 A5 A4 or B5 is fed from the cassette Other sizes of plain paper and paper types other than plain paper are fed from the rear tray Rear Tray Paper is always fed from the rear tray Cassette Paper is always fed from the cassette P important Plain paper that is not Letter 8 5 x11 A5 A4 or B5 and paper types other than plain paper cannot be fed from the cassette Continuous Autofeed When plain paper runs out in the specified paper source the p
40. 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files E Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Adjusting Images Page 175 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Adjusting Images A067 Easy PhotoPrint EX Adjusting Images You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness contrast etc of images 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears 22 Corect Enhance Im J2 Asto Photo Fix gt 22 Face Shspener 29 Digtal Face Snoothng ed RedEye Coneetion R Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be adjusted See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window N Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in
41. Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles gt Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper s gt Cleaning Inside the Printer Managing the Printer Power Related Features Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Canon IJ Status Monitor Page 331 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Status Monitor P411 Canon IJ Status Monitor If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information The Canon lJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing on the Windows screen You will know the status of the printer with graphics icons and messages Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor The Canon lJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer When launched the Canon lJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar EE Note To open the Canon lJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer When Errors Occur
42. Cassette can damage the printer Always load in the Rear Tray When loading paper in stacks the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly In this case load one sheet at a time except for Matte Photo Paper lt MP 101 gt For printing business documents e High Resolution Paper lt HR 101N gt Media type settings Printer driver High Resolution Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray 80 sheets Paper Output Tray load limit 50 sheets Note Feeding this paper from the Cassette can damage the printer Always load in the Rear Tray For creating your own prints e T Shirt Transfers lt TR 301 gt Page 37 of 468 pages Media Types You Can Use Media type settings Printer driver T Shirt Transfers e Photo Stickers lt PS 101 gt Media type settings Printer driver Glossy Photo Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray 1 sheet Paper Output Tray load limit We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration E Note Feeding this paper from the Cassette can damage the printer Always load in the Rear Tray You can easily specify print settings with Easy PhotoPrint EX provided on the Setup CD ROM Install it on your computer Page Sizes You can use the following page sizes Note You can load plain paper of the following page sizes in the Cassette A4 B5
43. Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data m Overview of the Printer Driver Page top Various Printing Methods Page 250 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation s gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order s gt Setting the Stapling Margin Execute Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing gt Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing s gt Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background s gt Printing an Envelope s gt Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing s gt Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page top Printing with Easy Setup Page 251 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing with Easy Setup P000 Printing with Easy Setup The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this printer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select a frequently used profile In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select a printing profile suited for the purpose
44. E E Contents gt Overview of the Printer gt Main Components C001 Main Components gt Front View sp Rear View Inside View m Front View 8 7 6 5 1 Top Cover Open to replace the ink tanks or remove jammed paper inside the printer 2 Paper Guides Slide to align with both sides of the paper stack 3 Rear Tray Load photo paper or envelopes which you can use on the printer Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper 4 Paper Support Open and pull out to load paper in the Rear Tray 5 Cassette Load A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper and insert it into the printer Two or more sheets of the same size of plain paper can be loaded at the same time and fed automatically one sheet at a time See Loading Paper 6 Direct Print Port Connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera to print directly See Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device A Warning Do not connect any equipment other than PictBridge compliant devices to the Direct Print Port of the printer This may cause fire electric shock or damage to the printer Page 4 of 468 pages Main Components gt Important Do not touch the metal casing 7 Paper Output Tray Printed paper is ejected Open it fully before printing 8 Output Tray Extension Extend and open to support the pri
45. EE Note Cannot Install the Printer Driver Page 390 of 468 pages The printer is not detected Check the connection may be displayed depending on the computer you use In this case follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers 1 Click Cancel 2 Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen 3 Click Back on the screen that appears next 4 Click Exit on the PIXMA XXX screen where XXX is your printer s name then remove the CD ROM 5 Turn the printer off 6 Restart the computer 7 Make sure that you have no application software running 8 Insert the CD ROM again then perform Easy Install to install the printer driver e In other cases Follow the procedure described in your setup manual for proper installation If the driver was not installed correctly uninstall the printer driver restart your computer then reinstall the driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver If you reinstall the printer driver perform Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then select IJ Printer Driver E Note If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the driver Restart your computer before reinstalling Page top Cannot Install the Application Program Page 391 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Install the Application Program U347 Cannot Install the Applica
46. Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Instructions for Use Printer Driver P036 Instructions for Use Printer Driver This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver Restrictions on the Printer Driver e Depending on the document type to be printed the paper feed method specified in the printer driver may not operate correctly If this happens open the printer driver setup window from the Print dialog box of the application software and check the setting in the Paper Source field on the Main tab e With some applications the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled In this case use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software e f the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface language the driver screen may not be displayed properly e Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties If you change any of the items you will not be able to use the following functions correctly Also if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor the following functions will not operate e Preview before printing on the Main tab e Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box e Page Layout Poster Booklet D
47. If the printer driver is not installed the menu of CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM is not displayed on Solution Menu EX Install the printer driver then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM e Check 6 Is the printer selected on Solution Menu EX If the printer is not selected on Solution Menu EX the menu of CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM is not displayed on Solution Menu EX Select the printer for Select Model on Solution Menu EX s Settings in the Help amp Settings menu then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM e Check 7 Is bidirectional support of the printer driver enabled If bidirectional support of the printer driver is not enabled an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen make sure that bidirectional support of the printer driver is enabled then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again ES Note To enable bidirectional support of the printer driver select the Enable bidirectional support check box under the Ports tab in Properties of the printer driver e Check 8 Is Internet access available To access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM it is necessary to access the Internet Make sure that your computer is available for Internet access then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again Cannot Print the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM e Check 1 Is Easy PhotoPrint EX installed lf Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed you cannot print the contents on CREATIVE PARK Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Pag
48. Long eide stapling Lett Specty Margi Soons gt 1595 1 Lem i Port tom Last Page Colste Pa Options Stamp Background Detauts 0K cma C oy Hee 3 Set Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees 4 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation EE Note f Normal size is selected for Page Layout then Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output is displayed Normally you can leave the Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output check box checked During printing if you do not want to reduce large documents that cannot be printed on the printer uncheck the check box Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 254 of 468 pages Page top Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Page 255 of 468 pages AdvancediGmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order P001 Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup win
49. Menu EX and click the Movie Print icon E Note The Movie Print window displayed via Solution Menu EX is used as an example in the following descriptions The window displayed varies depending on how Easy PhotoPrint EX is started images to in the Edit screen then click Movie Print Print Nadia Type Print Setings Auto Frame Capture Setings 00005 83 z K Capture 4 Captured framets f 4 Solect Video 7 k Savo e i f m 000 00 76 T 0 00 03 06 0000583 4 Sort by Tene Exit ClWsersisertameiyi_0ool MOV Selected 3 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area 2 Preview Area 3 Captured Frame s Area 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Print Area You can print the captured still images Print Media Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy II Page Size 4 x6 10x15cm Print Settings Note Page 187 of 468 pages This function is available only when the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX Media Type Displays the media type specified in the Print Settings dialog box Page Size Displays the paper size specified in the Print Settings dialog box Print Settings Displays the Print Settings dialog box in which you can make the basic print settings select printer media etc Print Starts printing the still images selected in the Captured frame s area Auto Frame Capture Settings Area You can capture multip
50. Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation e Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Bonjour is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e Adobe Adobe Photoshop Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB 1998 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries E9 Note The formal name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista operating system Exif Print This printer supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the camera s image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Page top Printing from a Computer Page 89 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer Printing from a Computer Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Page top Printing with the Bundled Ap
51. OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified color correction method P important When ICM is disabled in the application software ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable Related Topics Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Interpreting the ICC Profile Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profiles Page top Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Page 300 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data P014 Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data When people print images taken with digital cameras they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose Color Management Devices such as digital cameras scanners monitors and printers handle color differently Color management color matching is a method that manages device dependent
52. Page Layout When Duplex Printing is also selected only Staple Side can be specified Page top Execute Borderless Printing Page 259 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Execute Borderless Printing P003 Execute Borderless Printing The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper Without the borderless printing function a margin is provided around the printed data When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it set borderless printing The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab Setting Borderless Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set borderless printing Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab Canon iPS800 series Printing Preferences DR Gusck Setup E Man 33 Page Setup gf Btects J Martenance E Pape Sze Letier 85x11 l amp Onertation A Porat A Landrcece Rotate 180 degrees a Same os Page Size a EE 4s g Scaled Page Layout Click OK when the confirmation message appears When a message prompting you to change the media type appears select a media type from the list and click OK Exec
53. Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PT Photo Paper Pro Platinum SG Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss MP Matte Photo Paper e 3 is the print quality The print quality is divided into 5 levels ranging from high speed to high quality As the number decreases the print quality becomes higher This value corresponds to the Quality slide bar in the Custom dialog box of the printer driver 9 Page top Updating the Printer Driver Page 448 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Driver Updating the Printer Driver Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver s gt Before Installing the Printer Driver s Installing the Printer Driver Page top Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Page 449 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Drivers gt Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver P038 Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver By updating the printer driver to the latest version of the printer driver unresolved problems may be solved You can check the version of the printer driver by clicking the About button on the Maintenance tab Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest printer driver for your model P important You can download the printer driver for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before installing the latest printer driver delete
54. Replacing Photos gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos Setting Calendar Display s gt Setting Holidays P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited calendar It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again gt Saving E9 Note Editing Page 122 of 468 pages See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 123 of 468 pages AJAS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Printing A045 Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears A New Calendar Canon Easy PhetePrint EX ome fae hx File Edit View Help Check calendar perit settings Cick the Pring button to pring wah the current settings Printing starts preter Canon ooo Copies ik Paper Sge AS Paper Source Automatcaly Select bd Meca Typa Photo Paper Pius Gosi Paroa Standard J Ouplex Prnting Quality Setting Av T Borderiess Preng Advanced 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note m The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex P
55. Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print each page of the album on a full page without borders You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Printing 3 Click Print ES Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Page top Page 112 of 468 pages Printing Labels on Discs Page 113 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Labels on Discs A004 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Labels on Discs Start Easy PhotoPrint EX and select Disc Label in Menu to start CD LabelPrint CD LabelPrint allows you to print labels on printable discs BDs DVDs CDs etc easily For details on how to use CD LabelPrint install CD Labe
56. Setting 2 by 2 page poster printing is complete Poster Printing Page 270 of 468 pages 4 Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box and then click OK Image Dyisors Oreded rto 42x 2 S J Pret Gis Paste innog J Port Cit Paste ines in magns Print page range oe Pages Erter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3512 aD Gere Cote ie Image Divisions Select the number of divisions vertical x horizontal As the number of divisions increases the number of sheets used for printing increases allowing you to create a larger poster Print Cut Paste in margins To leave out words Cut and Paste uncheck this check box E Note This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used Print Cut Paste lines in margins To leave out cut lines uncheck this check box Print page range Specifies the printing range Select All under normal circumstances To reprint only a specific page select Pages and enter the page number you want to print To specify multiple pages enter the page numbers by separating them with commas or by entering a hyphen between the page numbers EA Note You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execut
57. Window through the Application Software Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing 1 Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use In general select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window opens E Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure print settings that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below a In Windows 7 select Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes E 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window opens P important Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties Windows 7 or Properties Windows Vista or Windows XP displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions
58. XPS printer driver is used 3 Click Save TA asek Senp gt Main 3 Page Senp of Erectie A Martenance Comemnarty Used Setings E Randers a EA Prete Parting m D Paper Saving 2 N Beuciene Z Additonal Festues Monl Prreeg Bordedess Pring 4001 Ponting Grayscale Prreng E Duplex Perting E Fest Speed Frosty Pret from Last Page Meds Type Porter Paper Sre Plan Pacer Leelee 85711 Orertaton Porat Landscape Pert Quality Paper Source Standort Atomaticaly Select Comes 1 S 143 EE Aways Brrt wth Curert Settings mseons Demets E Co e Heb Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 375 of 468 pages 4 Save the settings Enter a name in the Name field and if necessary set the items in Options Then click OK The printing profile is saved and the Quick Setup tab is displayed again The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list P important To save the page size orientation and number of copies that was set in each sheet click Options and check each item Note When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver the print settings you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved If a profile is deleted register the print settings again Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile 1 Select the printing profile to be d
59. You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash Using the Red Eye Correction Function Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background Using the Face Brightener Function Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo Using the Face Sharpener Function Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles Using the Blemish Remover Function Image Adjustment You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 158 of 468 pages You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color gt Adjusting Images Page top Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 159 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Auto Photo Fix Function A066 Using the Auto Photo Fix Function This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Prefe
60. a time E Note Depending on the media type the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward In such cases follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0 1 inch 3 mm B in height before printing This may improve the print result C C Printing side We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time e Check 4 If you are printing on thick paper select the Prevent paper abrasion setting Selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting will widen the clearance between the Print Head and the loaded paper If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper set the printer to prevent paper abrasion on the computer Print speed may be reduced if you are selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting Deactivate the Prevent paper abrasion setting once printing is complete If not this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs Open the printer driver setup window and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet select the Prevent paper abrasion check box and then click Send To open the printer driver setup window see Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Check 5 If the intensity is set high reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy ca
61. and cick the Prnt barian aa Printing siars Exif Print mia s E AE The number of frames per page varies depending on the size of the ID photo to create Check the number of frames in the layouts displayed in the Layout Print screen then specify the number of copies in the Select Images screen You can select two or more images and print different types of ID photos on one page See the following section for details on how to select photos s gt Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example ID Photo 3 5x4 5cm 135 2 4 6 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 214 of 468 pages a To display the Preferences dialog box click f Settings or select Preferences from the File menu ID photos can only be printed on 4 x6 10x15cm paper Page top Printing Photo Information Page 215 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Photo Information A079 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photo Information You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side To print them select Letter 8 5 x11 or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select Capt
62. and click OK The printer starts cleaning the Print Head deeply when the POWER lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 2 minutes 30 seconds 6 Confirm the message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern If a particular color is not printed properly replace the ink tank of that color See Replacing an Ink Tank If the problem is not resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center O A Page top Aligning the Print Head Page 59 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Aligning the Print Head C098 m Aligning the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory adjust the print head position You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 E9 Note If the remaining ink level is low the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly Replace the ink tank whose ink is low See Replaci
63. are not satisfactory see Manual Print Head Alignment and perform manual head alignment To change to the manual head alignment click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab and then check the Align heads manually check box The procedure for performing print head alignment is as follows Print Head Alignment 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens 3 Load paper in the printer Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size Matte Photo Paper MP 101 into the rear tray ES Note The type of media and number of sheets to be used differ when you select the manual head alignment 4 Execute head alignment Make sure that the printer is on and click Align Print Head Follow the instruction in the message E8 Note To print and check the current setting open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box and click Print Alignment Value Page top amp Manual Print Head Alignment Page 364 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Manual Print Head Alignment U065 Manual Print Head Alignment This section describes how to align the Print Head manually If the results of Automatic Print Head Alignment are not satisfactory follow the procedure below to perform Manual Print Head Alignment to precisely align the Print Head For details on performing Automatic Pr
64. can compare the images before and after the correction enhancement adjustment side by side The image before the correction enhancement adjustment is displayed on the left and the image after the correction enhancement adjustment is displayed on the right Page top Creating Still Images from Videos Page 183 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating Still Images from Videos A160 Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating Still Images from Videos You can capture video frames and create still images P important This function is supported under Windows XP or later However it is not supported under the 64 bit editions of Windows XP This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 5 or later Supplied with Canon digital cameras supporting MOV format video recording is not installed Videos may not play smoothly depending on your environment m When the color tone of a video is changed via the settings of the graphic driver video card or its utility such a change is not reflected in still images captured from the video Therefore color tones may differ between videos and captured still images 1 In the Select Images screen click J Capture frames from video The Video Frame Capture window and Select Video dialog box appear Video Frame Cacture Select Video Select he video you wert to capture Selected video f
65. canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected To display the printer status monitor click the printer icon on the taskbar In Windows Vista or Windows XP click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar O 0 Page 11 of 468 pages A Page top Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX Basic Guide Hi E Contents gt Printing gt Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX C052 m Using Various Functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy PhotoPrint EX For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Creating Your Own Prints You can create an album or calendar using your photos Stickers Layout Print Creating Still Images from Videos You can capture video frames and create still images A Page top Page 12 of 468 pages Printing Documents Page 13 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing gt Printing Documents C053 Printing Documents This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide E9 Note Operations may vary depending on your software application For details on the operation refer to the instruction manual of your application The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows 7 operating system Home Premium hereafter refer
66. cannot print items you create If Easy PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy LayoutPrint installed Easy LayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy PhotoPrint EX E9 Note See Help of Easy PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy PhotoPrint EX screens Click Help in a screen or dialog box or select Easy PhotoPrint EX Help from the Help menu Help appears About Exif Print Easy PhotoPrint EX supports Exif Print Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers By connecting to an Exif Print compliant digital camera the image data at the time of shooting is used and optimized yielding extremely high quality prints Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications Easy PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications See the application s manual for details on the procedure for starting What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 92 of 468 pages MP Navigator EX Ver 1 00 or later supports the following functions Photo Print Album ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 0 or later supports the following functions Photo Print Album ZoomBrowser EX Ver 5 8 or later supports the following function Album Digital Photo Professional Ver 3 2 or later supports the following function Photo Print P important Easy PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo Professional Menu and Open do not appear in the step button area on
67. device to the printer using a USB cable A recommended by the device s manufacturer The PictBridge compliant device turns on automatically If your device does not turn on automatically turn it on manually When printer is correctly connected to the device the message that the printer is connected will be displayed on the LCD of the device Refer to the device s instruction manual Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 351 of 468 pages 5 Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the printer Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device 6 Start printing from your PictBridge compliant device P important Never disconnect the USB cable during printing unless when explicitly allowed to by the PictBridge compliant device When disconnecting the USB cable between the PictBridge compliant device and printer follow the instructions given in the device s instruction manual Page top About PictBridge Print Settings Page 352 of 468 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device gt About PictBridge Print Settings U053 About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device This section describe
68. dries increase the ink drying wait time Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing 4 Transmit the settings Click Send and click OK when the confirmation message appears The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter Page top Troubleshooting Page 381 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange s gt POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately mb Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Install the Application Program s gt Cannot Connect to Computer Properly s gt Print Results Not Satisfactory Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly s gt Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Jams Message Appears on the Computer Screen Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing For Windows Users Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device m Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM If You Cannot Resolve the Problem mb FAQs s gt Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page top If an Error Occurs Page 382 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt
69. example when Number of Results per Page is set to 20 the images displayed in page 201 are the same as those displayed in page 202 and subsequent pages Note Point to a thumbnail to display its title license type and other information Right click a thumbnail and select Open web page of work from the displayed menu to start a browser and display the page of a photo sharing site on which the image is posted 4 Selections Area Thumbnails of the images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed along with the number of images number of selected images number of search results Cancels all image selections in the Selections area hana Cancel image selection Cancels the selection of images selected in the Selections area Note See Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites for details on how to download images from photo sharing sites Page top Questions and Answers Page 197 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers A200 Easy PhotoPrint EX Questions and Answers gt How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File s gt Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from s gt How Do Print with Even Margins m What Is C1 or C4 Page top How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File Page 198 of 468 pages Advanced Giitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing
70. green the printer is initializing Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit green E Note When printing large data such as a photo or graphics it may take longer to start printing While the POWER lamp is flashing green the computer is processing data and sending it to the printer Wait until printing starts Check 2 Check the status of ink tanks Replace the ink tank if ink has run out Check 3 Open the Top Cover and check to see if the ink lamps are flashing red If there is still sufficient ink but its ink lamp is flashing red an ink tank may not be installed in a right position m Routine Maintenance Check 4 Open the Top Cover and make sure that the ink lamps light up red If the ink lamp is not lit press the c mark on the ink tank until it clicks into place Check 5 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer When the printer is connected to your computer with a USB cable check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again Check 6 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer If there are any unnecessa
71. has occurred Count the flashes and take the appropriate action to correct the error B A A Note the number of flashes B Flashes repeatedly Number of flashes Cause Two flashes Printer is out of paper Paper does not feed Three flashes Paper Output Tray is closed Paper jams Four flashes Ink tank is not installed properly Ink may have run out Five flashes Print Head is not installed Print Head is defective Reload paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If the Paper Output Tray is closed open it The printer resumes printing If opening the Paper Output Tray does not resolve the problem or if the tray was open to begin with the paper may be jammed Remove the jammed paper reload paper properly in the printer then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Paper Jams e If the lamp on the ink tank is not lit the ink tank may not be installed properly Install an appropriate ink tank e f the lamp on the ink tank is flashing ink may have run out Replacing the ink tank is recommended If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing press the printer s RESUME CANCEL button with the ink tank installed Then printing can continue Replacing the ink tank is recommended after the printing The printer may be damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition Routine Maintenance EA Note f multiple
72. image data is printed with the selected print quality level and halftoning method P important Certain quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type E Note If part of an object is not printed selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem Related Topics gt Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page 295 of 468 pages Page top Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 296 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Printing a Color Document in Monochrome P012 Printing a Color Document in Monochrome The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set grayscale printing Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab hasap D Man E Page Setup of Efecte fl Martenance n Meds Tipe Pian Per zj j Paper Source Atcerascaly Saci X Pere Quaity Hh f amars a on Pian Paper Gom m Later 857x11 215 3279 dew Color rtensty Ago re Preview before panting _ ratnxctions _ Detauts ae ee ee 3 Complete
73. night scene using digital camera noise may appear in the image Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and make the printed photos more vivid Select me prener to use then select the o2e ane type of paser fr penno Prater Poe Sete Plane Proto F Proto Nose Resucten Proto Paper Pin Getty Photo Paper Sem gess P important This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box EE Note When the noise is severe change Normal to Strong The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Cropping Photos Photo Print Page 207 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Cropping Photos Photo Print A073 Ea ProaPrt EX Cropping Photos Photo Print Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the necessary portions Click i Crop Image in the Layout Print screen or double click the preview image Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK EE Note To move the cropping area place the cursor within the white frame and drag it Drag the white lines to enlarge reduce the cropping area
74. of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Printing with ICC Profiles P016 Printing with ICC Profiles When the image data has a specified input ICC profile you can print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the data effectively The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data When you print the editing and touch up results of Adobe Photoshop Canon Digital Photo Professional or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data To use this printing method use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from your application software be sure to select color management items from your application software For instructions refer to the manual of the application software you are using 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Med
75. of Canon genuine paper is shown in brackets You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number Purchase paper by name To specify the page size and media type when printing photos saved on a PictBridge compliant device or mobile phone refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Media Types You Can Use For printing photos e Photo Paper Pro Platinum lt PT 101 gt Media type settings Printer driver Photo Paper Pro Platinum e Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use lt GP 501 gt Media type settings Printer driver Glossy Photo Paper e Photo Paper Glossy lt GP 502 gt Media type settings Printer driver Glossy Photo Paper e Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il lt PP 201 gt Media type settings Printer driver Photo Paper Plus Glossy II e Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss lt SG 201 gt Media type settings Printer driver Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss e Matte Photo Paper lt MP 101 gt Media type settings Printer driver Matte Photo Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray 10 sheets for A4 Letter 8 5 x 11 5 x 7 13 x 18cm and 8 x 10 20 x 25cm 20 sheets for 4 x 6 10x 15cm Paper Output Tray load limit We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration Note Feeding this paper from the
76. of the overall image data during printing This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed wee Light is selected Normal is selected Dark is selected The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set DR ak Sem Man 13 Page Setup of Efecte Aj Martenance Meda Type Pian Paper z Paper Source Atomaca Seod m The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Specify the brightness Select Light Normal or Dark for Brightness and click OK The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Adjusting Brightness Page 310 of 468 pages 0 E amp Low High 0 a QO m Low High 0 a Q pi Low Hgh ABCDEF 1234567 otas Noma z Sample Type pans et 0 Q fe Standard gt Merete ups nok View Color Patter Coripe 5 0 a Low High 0K cancel Hep 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the data is printe
77. order Important Page 256 of 468 pages a When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function give priority to the printer driver settings However if the print results are not acceptable specify the function settings on the application software When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected for Page Layout Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page Layout E Note collated one by one starting from the last page These settings can be used in combination with Normal size Borderless Fit to Page Scaled By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate you can perform printing so that papers are Page Layout and Duplex Printing Page top Setting the Stapling Margin Page 257 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting the Stapling Margin P002 Setting the Stapling Margin The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Specify the side to be stapled
78. print job onward Some software applications may not have this function To display the preview to confirm the print result select the Preview before printing check box Some software applications may not have a preview function You can specify the detailed print settings on the Main sheet or Page Setup sheet For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide T Start printing Click Print or OK to start printing Page 14 of 468 pages Printing Documents Page 15 of 468 pages E Note To cancel a print job in progress press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor After canceling the print job blank sheets of paper may be ejected To display the printer status monitor click the printer icon on the taskbar In Windows Vista operating system hereafter referred to as Windows Vista or Windows XP click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head O A Page top Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Page 16 of 468 pages Basic Guide 1 E Contents gt Printing gt Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX C054 Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Easy WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer You can print web pages automatically resized
79. print quality settings first e e Check 1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded paper When these settings are incorrect you cannot obtain a proper print result If you are printing a photograph or an illustration incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color Also if you print with an incorrect paper type setting the printed surface may be scratched In borderless printing uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and the loaded paper The method of confirming the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you do with your printer To print from a PictBridge compliant Confirm by using your PictBridge compliant device device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device To print from a computer me by using the printer driver Printing with Easy Setup Check 2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected referring to the table in Check 1 Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing If you notice blurs or uneven colors increase the print quality setting and try printing again E Note You cannot change the print quality setting from a PictBridge compliant device Check 3 If the problem is not resolved there may be other causes See also the sections below sb Cannot Print to End of Job Part of the Page
80. print the downloaded content with Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 466 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Using Easy PhotoPrint EX A001 Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Start Easy PhotoPrint EX Ee Click Here Easy PhotoPrint EX EA Note See the section below for details on how to use Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing with the Bundled Application Software Create a Personalized Photo Album Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy PhotoPrint EX All you need to do is select which photos to use select a layout then load paper into your printer and print After you bind the printed sheets you ll have the one and only aloum of your memories You can change the layout and background and attach comments to photos You can arrange a photo across the left and right pages You can also select the size and orientation CHECK Select a theme background design to create a single themed album Decorate Items with Text and Frames You can add text and frames to photos Attach a description of the photo in an album and add a frame to enhance the photo s atmosphere Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 467 of 468 pa
81. printer driver cannot be installed Checking the Printer Status e Properly connect the personal computer and the printer For details on connection instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started e Turn off the printer Checking the Personal Computer Settings e Terminate all running applications e In Windows 7 Windows Vista log on as a user who has the administrator account In Windows XP log on as the computer administrator P important Before installing the latest printer driver delete the previously installed version For instructions on deleting the printer driver see Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Related Topics Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver s Installing the Printer Driver Page top amp Installing the Printer Driver Nelizinesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Drivers gt Installing the Printer Driver P041 Installing the Printer Driver You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest printer driver for your model The procedure for installing the downloaded printer driver is as follows LP 2 4 Turn off the printer Start the installer Double click the icon of the downloaded file The installation program starts P important In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when starting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appear
82. screen s may vary depending on what you create Oraz the portion within the white frome onto the area to crop Drag any square on the frome to resize the cropping area Drag the white squares on the image to adjust the area to be cropped and click OK Note See Help for details on cropping Cropping Photos Page 234 of 468 pages Page top Framing Photos Page 235 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Framing Photos A087 Framing Photos You can add frames to images P important You cannot add frames to images in Stickers Layout Print and PREMIUM Contents Print Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click Edit Image or double click the image Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create F Apoy to all mages in tha paga Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed photos EE Note Framing Photos Page 236 of 468 pages Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images ona selected page at one time Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the applicati
83. specify the shared settings again in the client system When the Same Printer Driver is Installed in the Print Server System and the Client System as the Local Printer e The net crawl function may automatically create a network printer icon on the client system Q Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 464 of 468 pages Page top Downloading Premium Content Page 465 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Downloading Premium Content A006 Downloading Premium Content Access the CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM website from Solution Menu EX to download content printable with Easy PhotoPrint EX and other applications P important You may only use the content downloaded or printed for personal purposes You may not use the content for commercial purposes 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Solution Menu EX then click Solution Menu EX Solution Menu EX starts 2 Select Canon Web Service then click the CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM icon The CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM website appears P important Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply 3 Select a category 4 Select and download the content you want to print EE Note The application required for printing depends on the downloaded content You need to install the downloaded content to print it with Easy PhotoPrint EX See Printing Premium Content for details on how to
84. the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit green e Check 2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver In the following instructions XXX signifies your printer s name 1 2 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege Select Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes Right click the Canon XXX icon then select Printer properties In Windows Vista or Windows XP right click the Canon XXX icon where XXX is your printer s name then select Properties Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port s e Ifthe setting is incorrect Reinstall the printer driver e Printing does not start even though the port named USBnnn is selected Launch Canon My Printer from the task tray select Diagnose and Repair Printer Follow the on screen instructions to set the correct printer port then select Canon XXX If the problem is not resolved reinstall the printer driver e Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer When the printer is connected to your computer wit
85. the ink lamp lights up red gt Important You cannot print if the ink tank is installed in the wrong position Be sure to install the ink tank in the correct position according to the label on the Print Head Holder You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed Be sure to install all the ink tanks 6 Close the Top Cover EE Note if the Alarm lamp still flashes orange after the Top Cover is closed refer to Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide When you start printing after replacing the ink tank the printer starts cleaning the Print Head automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head While cleaning is in progress the POWER lamp is flashing green If printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned adjust the print head position See Aligning the Print Head Page 45 of 468 pages Replacing an Ink Tank Page 46 of 468 pages O A Page top Checking the Ink Status Page 47 of 468 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing an Ink Tank gt Checking the Ink Status cog2 m Checking the Ink Status You can check the ink status on the ink lamps or your computer screen With the Ink Lamps 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Paper Output Tray gently 2 Open the Top Cover See step 2 in Replacing Proced
86. to Inside Pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click ta Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click S Delete All Imported Images Selecting a Photo E Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Page 140 of 468 pages Editing Page 141 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Editing A154 Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Edr layout omt elements as needed Insert taxt add rages or change layout 2 Edit the layout if necessary Changing Layout m Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again s gt Saving Note See Help for det
87. to fit the paper width without cutting off the sides of pages or preview and select the desired web pages to print Easy WebPrint EX requires Internet Explorer 7 or later gt Important It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Additionally reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights E9 Note For information on installing or starting Easy WebPrint EX see Easy WebPrint EX The clip function for example allows you to clip desired parts of web pages and edit them to print For details on operating Easy WebPrint EX refer to the online help Click Easy WebPrint EX A on the toolbar then select Help from the pull down menu to view the online help Tais pe site al are 7 ore Boy ibio cse A 0 0 tee uy wh O XXXXXXXXXXXX ax XXXXXXXXXXX reni etree Une D er rn ll a Dnne Git Gr amp wane Be WO om XXMKXRKXRKXE XXXXXXXXXAXX Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Page 17 of 468 pages O A Page top Starting Various Software Applications Page 18 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Printing gt Starting Various Software Applications C055 Starting Various Software Applications This section describes Solut
88. with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Can Move or Copy the Saved File A095 S Easy PhotoPrint EX a g SSE SS How Can I Move or Copy the Saved File of If you want to move or copy a file created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another you need to move or copy the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as well For example when you save a file named MyAlbum el1 a folder named MyAlbum el1 Data is automatically created in the same folder that contains the MyAlobum el1 file If you want to move or copy the MyAlbum eli file to another folder move or copy the MyAlobum el1 Data folder as well The MyAlbum el1 Data folder contains the photos used in the album s A 2 MyAlbum e MyAlbum e IL Data iL EE Note The icons may vary depending on the items P important Do not change the Data folder name otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited with Easy PhotoPrint EX For PREMIUM Contents Print using premium content images if you save the file and move it to another computer you will not be able to open the file Page top Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from Page 199 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt Which Side of t
89. 4 of 468 pages The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited item It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again gt Saving E Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 155 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Premium Content gt Printing A185 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears The content wil be printed n the selected yout Check that the printer is on ang cick the Print button Printing stars Prener canon xoa Copies Paper Sge As Paper Source Automatcally Select Maca Typa Photo Paper Plus Glossy It Prox Qvaity Standard X my Settinos y Settings F Borderiess Preng C Advanced EA Note Inthe actual screen the content you created is displayed instead of the gray area shown above 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types displayed may vary depending on the selected content printer and paper size The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display
90. 440 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes U502 Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Sie Printable Area width x height AS 5 56 x 7 95 inches 141 2x202 0mm B5 6 90 x 9 80 inches 175 2x249 0mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm e 1 60 in 40 7 mm 1 47 in 37 4 mm i sie 0 13 in 3 4 mm 0 13 in 3 4mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm HE Recommended printing area Printable area Page top Letter Legal Page 441 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Letter Legal U503 Letter Legal Size Printable Area width x height Letter 8 00 x 10 69 inches 203 2 x 271 4 mm Legal 8 00 x 13 69 inches 203 2 x 347 6 mm This page size can be used only when printing from your computer 4 0 12 in 3 0 mm 5 w 1 60 in 40 7 mm 0 20 in 5 0 mm 4T in 37 4 mm E i a A se th 0 25 in 6 4mm 0 25 in 6 3 mm HE Recommended printing area Printable area Page top Envelopes Page 442 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Printing Area gt Envelopes U505 Envelopes Size Recommended Printing Area width x height European DL 4 06 x 7 07 inches 103 2 x 179 6 mm US Comm Env 10 3 86 x 7 91 inches 98 0 x 200 9 mm This page size can be used only when printing f
91. 45 of 468 pages Nelizlnesel Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen D009 Message Appears on the Computer Screen Errors About Disc Label Printing Are Displayed e Check 1 If the Inner Cover is closed when starting disc label printing Open the Inner Cover properly place the Disc Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Do not open or close the Inner Cover while printing is in progress This may damage the printer Check 2 Is the Disc Tray placed properly Open the Inner Cover properly place the Disc Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the Disc Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the Disc Tray see Attaching Removing the Disc Tray Check 3 Is the printable disc placed on the Disc Tray Properly place the printable disc on the Disc Tray attach the Disc Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the Disc Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the Disc Tray see Attaching Removing the Disc Tray Check 4 Unrecognizable printable disc may be placed Canon recommends that you use printable discs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer Check 5 Is the printable disc on the Disc Tray already printed If you place a printable disc on which has a
92. 8 of 468 pages EA Note The date is displayed in the short date format mm dd yyyy etc specified in your operating system See Help for details on setting dates Page top Attaching Comments to Photos Page 239 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Attaching Comments to Photos A089 ri Attaching Comments to Photos You can attach comments to images and display them in your aloum The photo name shooting date and comments are displayed from top to bottom in a comment box A memory of summer 08 20 2010 Family playing with sa nd P important You cannot attach comments to Calendar Stickers Layout Print and PREMIUM Contents Print T Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click re Edit Image or double click the image Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Attaching Comments to Photos idtm a Postion amp Sze Crop Frame Date Comments F Show comment box Image Name Show image name Image Name IMG0032_s p9 Show line Comments Show comments Comments F Show line T Show capture date Coler E oey eoa taie Center Position 12 54 p 5 100
93. 8 pages AE Easy PhotoPrint EX SSE Replacing Photos You can replace an image with another image Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen then click cc nae Replace Selected Image EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The Edit Took Bove screen s may vary depending on what you create New mazer imoored mazes gt E eno Gag Loraries e wee AY A f a v7 amp D D Hq Computer O R niemork DGO00O_4J99 HG01 5429 14G0103_sjo9 t fp i D t BANAN Sinn INGAAT sisa _GNNTE sinn Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the Replace Image dialog box Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click OK If you want to select from the images already imported click the Imported Images tab and select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK P important You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box EE Note If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function all the images selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog box When images are replaced the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image Pos
94. A5 and Letter sizes Plain paper of other sizes cannot be loaded in the Cassette Load them in the Rear Tray Standard sizes Letter 8 50 x 11 00 inches 215 9 x 279 4 mm Legal 8 50 x 14 00 inches 215 9 x 355 6 mm A5 5 83 x 8 27 inches 148 0 x 210 0 mm A4 8 27 x 11 69 inches 210 0 x 297 0 mm B5 7 17 x 10 12 inches 182 0 x 257 0 mm 4 x6 4 00 x 6 00 inches 10 x 15 cm 4 x 8 4 00 x 8 00 inches 101 6 x 203 2 mm 5 x 7 5 00 x 7 00 inches 13 x 18 cm 8 x 10 8 00 x 10 00 inches 20 x 25 cm L 3 50 x 5 00 inches 89 0 x 127 0 mm 2L 5 00 x 7 01 inches 127 0 x 178 0 mm Hagaki 3 94 x 5 83 inches 100 0 x 148 0 mm Hagaki 2 7 87 x 5 83 inches 200 0 x 148 0 mm Comm Env 10 4 12 x 9 50 inches 104 6 x 241 3 mm DL Env 4 33 x 8 66 inches 110 0 x 220 0 mm Choukei 3 4 72 x 9 25 inches 120 0 x 235 0 mm Choukei 4 3 54 x 8 07 inches 90 0 x 205 0 mm Youkei 4 4 13 x 9 25 inches 105 0 x 235 0 mm Youkei 6 3 86 x 7 48 inches 98 0 x 190 0 mm Card 2 16 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Wide 4 00 x 7 10 inches 101 6 x 180 6 mm Non standard sizes You can also specify a custom size within the following range Minimum size 2 17 x 3 58 inches 55 0 x 91 0 mm Rear Tray Maximum size 8 50 x 26 61 inches 215 9 x 676 0 mm Rear Tray Paper Weight 17 to 28 Ib 64 to 105 g m 2 except for Canon genuine paper Do not use heavier
95. About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label gt Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label D001 Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label e e Be sure to use the Disc Tray supplied with this printer It has an G on the upper side Do not print on printable discs that are not compatible with inkjet printing The ink will not dry and may cause problems with the disc itself or devices which the disc is loaded onto Do not print on the printable discs recording surface Doing so will make data recorded on discs unreadable Hold the printable discs by their edges Do not touch either the label surface printing surface or recording surface Remove any dirt from the Disc Tray before placing printable discs on the Disc Tray Loading discs in a dirty Disc Tray may scratch the recording surface of the discs After printing allow the printing surface of the disc to dry naturally Do not use hairdryers or expose the disc to direct sunlight to dry the ink Do not touch the printing surface until the ink has dried Do not attach the Disc Tray while the printer is in operation Do not remove the Disc Tray while printing on printable discs Doing so may damage the printer the Disc Tray or the disc Do not get dirt or scratches on the reflectors of the Disc Tray The printer may not be able to recognize loading of the printable disc or printing may become misaligned If the reflectors on the Disc Tray become dirty wipe the reflector clean
96. Canon iP4800 series On screen Manual How to Use This Manual Canon Printing This Manual iP4800 series On screen Manual xa we MG 5240 V1 00 ss Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting Describes the summary of Describes the detailed this product function of this product Page 1 of 468 pages iP4800 series Basic Guide Page 2 of 468 pages Canon iP4800 series e e How to Use This Manual Basic Guide WPrinting This Manual W bout Disc Label Printing MP 5113 V1 00 a WlAdvanced Guide F Contents Overview of the Printer Routine Maintenance Main Components Replacing an Ink Tank When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Printing Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Printing Documents Opening the Maintenance Screen Printing Web Pages Easy WebPrint EX Starting Various Software Applications gt Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and gt Other Usages Use of Images Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Tips on How to Use Your Printer Device Loading Paper Loading Paper Overview of the Printer Page 3 of 468 pages Basic Guide c E Contents gt Overview of the Printer Overview of the Printer This section shows the component names of the printer and describes their functions Main Components Front View Rear View Inside View 4 Page top Main Components Basic Guide
97. Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the appropriate type of paper used Check the followings e Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose Loading Paper e When performing Borderless Printing make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless Printing If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing the print quality may be reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper Printing Area e Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl e For Plain Paper Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side Leaving the paper loaded on the Rear Tray for a long time may cause the paper to curl In this case load the paper with the other side facing up It may resolve the problem We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface e For Other Paper If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0 1 inch 3 mm A in height the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly In such cases follow the procedure described below to correct the paper curl Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 403 of 468 pages l A 1 Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below 4 a 2 Check that the paper is now flat We recommend printing curl corrected paper one sheet at
98. Directly You can print labels on printable discs using Photo Print If you want to edit the details return to Menu and select Disc Label and edit print using CD LabelPrint See Printing Labels on Discs for details EE Note See Selecting a Photo to complete operations in the Select Images screen first P important Do not set the disc tray until a message prompting you to load a printable disc appears Loading a printable disc while the machine is operating may damage the machine 1 Select Printable Disc for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen Set the Printer and Media Type according to the printer and printable disc to be used Exif Print EA Note When Printable Disc is selected for Paper Size only Disc tray will be selectable for Paper Source 2 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Printing Labels on Discs Directly Select the layout you want to prev Check tre Preven and cick te Print bution Exif Print gt ERG Orde 3 Select a layout you want to use 4 Enter the title s and specify the details of the layout in Advanced E8 Note Items that can be set may vary depending on the selected layout 5 Click Print Follow the message to load a printable disc then start printing Printing starts from the top of the image displayed in Preview EE Note You can adjust the printing position on the printable disc in the Adjust dialog
99. E Note Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing To correct automatically select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and select the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears RedEye Conectori owe gt 22 Face Shypena Digtal Face Smoothing C Uters UserNameiboyandgrtjpg Selected 3 EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 162 of 468 pages Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Red Eye Correction 5 Click OK Red eyes are corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image P important Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image Note Click Compare to display the imag
100. General Settngs then select a theme Cick the buttons at the bottom of the screen to spect y layout ang background After spectying pacer sae atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Sze At m F Ooubie page abum Qraraton poter AJO Lanescape Meage number Settngs Cowes Froet amp Gack Oprens Samole Layout Srrole Front Cover Inside Pages Back Cover 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Cover Double page aloum Page number E Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the Cover Options dialog box To display the Cover Options dialog box select Front or Front amp Back for Cover and click Options Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout consisting of two page master In a double page album you can arrange an image across the left and right pages You can customize the page numbers position font size etc in the Page Number Settings dialog box To display the Page Number Settings dialog box select the Page number checkbox and click Settings You can customize the margins of the front cover inside pages and back cover in the Margin Settings dialog box To display the Margin Settings dialog box click Margins 3 Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout
101. Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Color Balance P017 Adjusting Color Balance You can adjust the color tints when printing Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color it changes the total color balance of the document Use the application software when you want to change the color balance significantly Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform No adjustment Adjust color balance The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set DR cusck Sep Man 13 Page Setup af Efecte fj Martenance Meda Tipe Pan Paver Paper Source Atomapcaly Seinct The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens Adjusting Color Balance Page 308 of 468 pages 3 Adjust color balance There are individual slider
102. Is Not Printed No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks m Lines Are Misaligned Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially s gt Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout s gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page top Cannot Print to End of Job Page 394 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Cannot Print to End of Job U311 Cannot Print to End of Job e Check 1 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 2 Is the space of your computer s hard disk sufficient Delete unnecessary files to free disk space Page top Part of the Page Is Not Printed Page 395 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satistactory gt Part of the Page Is Not Printed U312 Part of the Page Is Not Printed e Check When performing automatic duplex printing the reason below is possible When performing automatic duplex printing the printable area at the top of the page will be 0 08 inches 2 mm narrower than the usual For this reason the bottom of the page may not be printed To prevent this select Use reduced print
103. Last Page Colste Pact Options Stsmp Backgreund Danas ox haa toy Helo The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be printed with the specified scale P important When the application software which you created the original has the scaled printing function configure the settings on your application software You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver When Scaled is selected the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable when Duplex Printing is not selected Note Page 265 of 468 pages Scaled Printing Page 266 of 468 pages Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document Page top Page Layout Printing AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Page Layout Printing P006 Page Layout Printing The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows 4 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set page layout printing Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side
104. Note Inthe actual screen layouts for the selected Contents Type are displayed instead of the gray area shown above Alternatively select Canon Web Service of Solution Menu EX and click the PREMIUM Contents Print icon to start Easy PhotoPrint EX P important PREMIUM Contents Print is not displayed in Menu of Easy PhotoPrint EX To print premium content start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu EX following the steps above Keep these points in mind when using PREMIUM Contents Print To print with Easy PhotoPrint EX you need to download and install the exclusive content See Downloading Premium Content for details on how to download content Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 149 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Premium Content gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A182 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Set the following items in the General Settings section of the Page Setup screen Paper Size Contents Type When Content Other than Calendars is Selected for Contents Type 2 Select a layout from Layouts P important The layout does not appear if the allowed number of print copies was exceeded or the usage period has elapsed EA Note m gt Cannot print appears on the bottom right of the thumbnails reduced images of layouts that do not support the selected paper size
105. Page 342 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label gt Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer D007 Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer e CD LabelPrint is bundled application software that allows you to edit and modify data before printing Install it on your computer to use it To install this software insert the the computer s disc drive then perform Custom Install and select CD LabelPrint e For details on how to print with CD LabelPrint refer to its manual Click Start gt All Programs gt CD LabelPrint gt Manual Setup CD ROM into a oe ee in ru e eam L RABaa Page top Printing Area Page 343 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label gt Printing Area D015 Printing Area Printable Discs The printing area of the printable disc is the area excluding the 0 03 inches 1 mm area from the internal and external diameters of the label 0 03 in 1 0 mm E 0 03 in 1 0 mm el la 0 03 in 1 0 mm E 4 0 03 in 1 0 mm HB Recommended printing area Page top Troubleshooting Page 344 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Message Appears on the Computer Screen Cannot Print on the Disc Label Page top Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 3
106. Preview E Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Adjust 4 Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level The following adjustments are available Brightness Adjusting Images Page 176 of 468 pages Contrast Sharpness Blur Show through Removal E Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the adjustment side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Advanced to make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone See Advanced in the descriptions of the Correct Enhance Images window for details Click Defaults to reset all adjustments 5 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save adjusted images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for adjusted images 6 Click Exit P important The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images Page top Correct Enhance Images Window Page 177 of 468 pages Nelizjnesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Correct Enhance Images Window A068 Easy PhotoPrint EX Correct Enhance Images Window You can correct e
107. Print to the following port s e If the setting is incorrect If the problem is not resolved reinstall the printer driver e Printing does not start even though the port named USBnnn is selected Launch Canon My Printer from the task tray select Diagnose and Repair Printer Follow the on screen instructions to set the correct printer port then select Canon XXX If the problem is not resolved reinstall the printer driver e Check 10 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog Page top Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Page 411 of 468 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Stops Before It Is Completed U322 Printing Stops Before It Is Completed e Check 1 Is the Inner Cover opened while printing on paper Close the Inner Cover and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer A page of print data being sent at the time of the error will be erased so print that page again e Check 2 Has the printer been printing continuously for a long period If the printer has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head may overheat To protect the Print Head the printer may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing In this case interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the printer off for at least 15 minute
108. Printer 2 Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source EE Note For details on other settings for Paper Source refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 3 Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Paper Size and Media Type Here we select 4 x6 10x15cm in Paper Size and the type of the loaded photo paper in Media Type E Note Page 10 of 468 pages Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX If you select A4 or Letter sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source the printer feeds the paper from the Cassette If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper the printer feeds the paper from the Rear Tray If you select the wrong page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality 4 Click Layout Print 3 5 Select a layout and start printing 1 Select the layout of the photo Here we select Borderless full The preview will appear in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result E8 Note You can change the direction of photo or crop photos to print For details on the operation refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Click Print eee eee ee 3E err E9 Note To cancel a print job in progress press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer or click Cancel Printing on the printer status monitor After
109. Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab FR Osek Seno E Man B Page Setup of octe d Marterance Comenarty Used Serene BB Prete Pertrg E Banes Oocumert Addtional Festures M Rotate 180 degrees Meda Type Porter Paper Sre Envelope beter 85711 Onertation Porat Pert Quality Papar Source Standort v Automatically Select Copes 1 EE Aways Bore wth Curert Settings tystractons 4 Select the paper size When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed select Comm Env 10 DL Env Youkei 4 Printing an Envelope Page 287 of 468 pages 105x235mm or Youkei 6 98x190mm and then click OK 5 Set the orientation To print the addressee horizontally select Landscape for Orientation 6 Select the print quality Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality 7 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the information is printed on the envelope P important When you execute envelope printing guide messages are displayed To hide the guide messages check the Do not show this message again check box To show the guide again click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab and start the Canon lJ Status Monitor Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu and change the setting to on Page top Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Page 288 of
110. Standard EE Note PictBridge is the Standard to print your photos directly without using a computer connecting a device such as a digital still camera digital camcorder or camera equipped mobile phone M PictBridge A device with this mark is PictBridge compliant Printable image data format This printer accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system and PNG files Exif 2 2 2 21 compliant A Page top Loading Paper Page 23 of 468 pages Basic Guide zl E Contents gt Loading Paper Loading Paper This section describes types of paper you can load and how to load printing paper in the Cassette or Rear Tray Loading Paper Paper Sources to Load Paper Loading Paper in the Cassette Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Loading Photo Paper Loading Envelopes Media Types You Can Use Media Types You Cannot Use A Page top Loading Paper Page 24 of 468 pages Basic Guide z E Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper C071 Loading Paper m Paper Sources to Load Paper m Loading Paper in the Cassette m Loading Paper in the Rear Tray m Media Types You Can Use sp Media Types You Cannot Use m Paper Sources to Load Paper The printer has two paper sources to feed paper Cassette and Rear Tray You can load paper in either one of the paper sources depending on the page size and media type of paper Paper is fed from the Cassette or Rear Tray depending on the selectio
111. The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs e g if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low 1 Load paper into the cassette 2 Press the parter s RESUME Pisin paper of A4 Letter B5 and AS sizes wil be fed from the cassete because Asomstcaly Select is selected for Paper Source in the pater Giver In such cases take the appropriate action as described Page top Canon IJ Preview Page 332 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon IJ Preview P412 Canon IJ Preview The Canon lJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout print order and number of pages You can also change the media type and paper source settings When you want to display a preview before printing open the printer driver setup window click the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab and check the Preview before printing check box When you do not want to display a preview before printing uncheck the check box P important If you are using the XPS printer driver see Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Related Topic Displaying the Print Result
112. What can do e Alarm lamp is flashing orange 0 00 0 0o A B A C A Alarm lamp flashes B Alarm lamp is off C Alarm lamp flashes repeatedly Your printer has an error Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide then resolve the error e POWER lamp flashes green and Alarm lamp flashes orange alternately An error that requires repair has occurred Contact the service center m Colors are uneven and print results are blurred Tip Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are clogged If the print head nozzles are clogged colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred In this case Print the nozzle check pattern Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect O A Page top Page 70 of 468 pages iP4800 series Advanced Guide Page 71 of 468 pages iP 4800 series Advanced Guide MC 5273 V1 00 F Basic Guide Printing roubleshooting Printing from a Computer How to Use This Manual Printing with the Bundled Application Software ome What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing This Manual Printing Photos About Disc Label Printing Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper Changing the Printer Settings Printing When you display this on screen Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX manualin a language Selecting the Paper and Layout environment o
113. When placing a printable disc on the Disc Tray do not touch the printing surface of the disc or the reflectors C on the Disc Tray e 4 72 inches 12 cm printable disc 1 Place the printable disc on the Disc Tray with the printable surface facing up e 3 15 inches 8 cm printable disc Attaching Removing the Disc Tray 1 Align the protrusions on both edges of the 3 15 inches 8 cm Disc Adapter with indentations on the Disc Tray 2 Place the 3 15 inches 8 cm printable disc on the Disc Tray with the printing surface facing up 4 Attach the Disc Tray to the printer E8 Note The Disc Tray may be ejected after a specified period of time has elapsed In this case follow the on screen instructions to attach the Disc Tray 5 Insert the Disc Tray straight until the arrow D on the Inner Cover is almost aligned with the arrow lt on the Disc Tray D Keep the Disc Tray level when inserting it E Align the arrow lt on the Disc Tray with the arrow gt on the Inner Cover P important m Do not insert the Disc Tray beyond the arrow gt on the Inner Cover Removing the Disc Tray Page 338 of 468 pages Attaching Removing the Disc Tray 1 Pull out the Disc Tray 2 Close the Inner Cover P important If the Inner Cover is opened you cannot print on paper as it will not feed properly Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed 3 Remove the printable disc from the Disc Tray
114. When you click such a thumbnail a dialog box in which you can change the paper size appears Right click a thumbnail and select Properties from the displayed menu to check the allowed number of print copies usage period supported paper sizes etc of the selected layout When Calendars is Selected for Contents Type 2 Set the following items in the Design Settings section Design Orientation 3 Select a layout from Layouts P important The layout does not appear if the allowed number of print copies was exceeded or the usage period has elapsed EA Note The layouts displayed vary depending on the Design and Orientation m gt Cannot print appears on the bottom right of the thumbnails reduced images of layouts that do not support the selected paper size When you click such a thumbnail a dialog box in which you can change the paper size appears Right click a thumbnail and select Properties from the displayed menu to check the allowed number of print copies usage period supported paper sizes etc of the selected layout 4 Set the following items in the Calendar Settings section Start from Period Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 150 of 468 pages EA Note You can specify the display style of the days of the week in the Calendar Settings dialog box To display the Calendar Settings dialog box click Advanced ES Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O 0 Page top Sele
115. Windows XP the contents of files cannot be displayed on Explorer 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open The Edit screen appears P important Files saved from PREMIUM Contents Print cannot be opened from Library 3 Edit the file if necessary EA Note See the following sections for details on the editing procedures s gt Editing Album s gt Editing Calendar Editing Stickers Opening Saved Files Page 248 of 468 pages Editing Layout Print ES Note Easy PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats extensions Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file e14 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 Easy PhotoPrint EX PREMIUM Contents file el7 CD LabelPrint data cld You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX with the following methods besides from Library in Menu Click Open in the step button area of each screen then select the file you want to edit Double click the file From the File menu click Open then select the file you want to edit You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu Page top Printing with Other Application Software Page 249 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods s
116. a gt Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration P408 Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images It is specially designed to compensate for color shift overexposure and underexposure The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Optimizer PRO Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab 1 Yjvid Photo Pisin Paper Leter 85x11 215 5 273 4mm Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box Images within each page are optimized on an image by image basis EA Note Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been processed such as being cropped or rotated In this case the entire page will be treated as a single image to be optimized 3 Complete the setup Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 322 of 468 pages Click OK When you execute print the printer corrects the photo coloring and prints out the photos P important Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when Background is set in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab Define Stamp is selected in the Stamp Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab and the bitmapped stamp is configured Note Dependin
117. ace Sharpener Note Page 168 of 468 pages s Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener 5 Click OK The face is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note m Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result m Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation m lf you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Sharpener Correct Enhance ALAA RedEye Comection Face Shoipernt PETOJ Wear Storg octy the yea you wart to comect of Dipta Face Smoothing 92 Blemish Remover Note m Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 169 of 468 pages The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the re
118. ace Smoothing l 7 oF Ips grantiower pg CA Users UserNamelgitlieg Selected 3 EA Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Blemish Remover Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 174 of 468 pages ad ARA RedEye Connection 2 Face Brightenes 29 Face Sharpener os Digtal Face Smoothing 29 Blemish Remover Specty the wes pou want to couoct EA Note Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to enhance then click OK that appears over the image Moles in and around the selected area are removed andthe amp Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation
119. age 274 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Duplex Printing P007 Duplex Printing The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab Performing Automatic Duplex Printing You can perform the duplex printing without having to turn over the paper 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set automatic duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab and confirm that Automatic is checked J a j x R ak Setup gt Man 2 Pose Seun gf Efecte A Martenance a El age Sze Lotier 85x117 z Onertation la Porat A uneo F Rotate 180 degrees a Same os Page Size a E U 3 A Pian Paper Leter 8 57x11 215 82794m Nomelsize Boneless FetoPage Page Layat 0O F Automatically reduce large document that the perter cannct output Copies 1 Hos E i E Port iom Last Page Colte Pag Options Samp Backuground Detauts E Ea toe Hee 3 Select the layout Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list 4 Set the print area When you perform duplex printing the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than usual and the document may not fit on
120. ages 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Face Brightener Function Page 164 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Brightener Function A062 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Brightener Function You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background EE Note You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo Fix If the correction had not been made sufficiently applying Face Brightener function is recommended Using the Auto Photo Fix Function 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears Ex CA Users UserName samph0l jpg EA Note a You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window Selected 3 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail li
121. ails on the Edit screen O Editing Page 142 of 468 pages Page top Printing Page 143 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Printing A155 Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Pring mapes n the selected byot Cick the Print button Co print wth the arent senings Printing starts Preter canon ooo r Copias Paper Sge E lS Pagar Source Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy IL Print Quality Ouplex Pmtng T Borderless Prezeg AIVAN Gnas 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Qualit
122. all the Printer Driver U308 Cannot Install the Printer Driver e If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD ROM is inserted into your computer s disc drive Start the installation following the procedure below 1 Click Start then Computer In Windows XP click Start then My Computer 2 Double click the Ep CD ROM icon on the displayed window If the contents of the CD ROM are displayed double click MSETUP4 EXE EE Note f the CD ROM icon is not displayed try the following e Remove the CD ROM from your computer then insert it again e Restart your computer If the icon is still not displayed try different discs and see if they are displayed If other discs are displayed there is a problem with the Setup CD ROM In this case contact the service center e If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen Printer Connection Make sure that the printer is connected to the computer and turn on the printer STEP 3 Setup Printer Connection Primt Head Alignment Load plain paper into the s v4 cassette 3 Completion STEP 4 j Information The printer is not detected Check the connection Hep _Cancel If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged into the USB port of the printer and is connected to the computer and then follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers
123. alog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings 3 Select a layout from Layouts EA Note The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation ES Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 138 of 468 pages Page top Selecting a Photo Page 139 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting a Photo A153 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Selact rrapes for Grout ormting You can aso add repace mages brer ri the edang process To comet or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button Apoy corrections and enhancements in the resuming screen dq 2is E Sor by Date a HE oeio Tf amp Lovrares 1 Coroso E Network IHGODI2_ siog 1MG000 _sJ99 D4G0002_sio9 Inside Pages 0 mage s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import
124. an image if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder the image may not be displayed correctly or Easy PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format In such cases move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different data format and then select the folder again What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX EA Note The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as Question Mark When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional all image files supported by Digital Photo Professional will be displayed File Formats Extensions Supported by Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file el6 Easy PhotoPrint EX Album file el1 Easy PhotoPrint EX Stickers file el2 Easy PhotoPrint EX Calendar file e14 Easy PhotoPrint EX Layout file el5 Easy PhotoPrint EX PREMIUM Contents file el7 CD LabelPrint data cld Page top Page 93 of 468 pages Printing Photos Page 94 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos A010 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Photos Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts You can also create borderless photos easily Corrections suitable for photos can be applied automatically when printing p nS 2 Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting a Photo 3 Selecting t
125. anceled Identifying badges or insignias Selective service or draft papers Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title Traveler s checks Food stamps Passports Immigration papers Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates Copyrighted works works of art without permission of copyright owner O A Page top Page 66 of 468 pages Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 67 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix gt Tips on How to Use Your Printer C112 Tips on How to Use Your Printer This section introduces the tips on how to use your printer and for printing with optimal quality m Ink is used for various purposes How is ink used for various purposes other than printing Ink may be used for purposes other than printing Ink is not only used for printing but also for cleaning the Print Head to maintain the optimal printing quality The printer has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging In the cleaning procedure ink is pumped out from the nozzles Used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a small amount Does black and white printing use color ink Black and white printing may use ink other than black ink depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver So color ink is consumed
126. and bottom of the sheet or stains may form When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used In this case crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size Note When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab borderless printing is not recommended and therefore the message for media selection appears When you are using plain paper for test printing select Plain Paper and click OK Expanding the Range of the Document to Print Setting a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems However the portion of the document extending off the paper range will not be printed Subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed Try borderless printing once When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing reduce the amount of extension The extension amount decreases as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left P important When the amount of extension is decreased an unexpected margin may be produced on the print depending on the size of the paper Note When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position image data will be printed in the full size When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab you can confirm whether there will be no Execute Borderless Printing Page 261 of 468 pages bor
127. ant to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click ta Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click S Delete All Imported Images Selecting a Photo E Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Page 130 of 468 pages Editing Page 131 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Editing A054 es Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede suckers as needed Insert text add mages or change layout is 2 Edit the stickers if necessary Adding Photos Swapping Posi
128. anual gt Registering Documents to My Manual Registering Documents to My Manual Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents easily at any time gt Canon H series On screen Manual 4 Bock P Gh U Contents ye my Manual Search amp Print Q s r My Manual x Canon a na arse Aad Delete gt List of My Manwal senes Cron serine Orr screen Maral Recently Displayed Documents _ Canon series Orrescreen Manual wera Advanced Guide Troubleshooting 1 Display the document Display the document to be added to My Manual 2 Click A MManuai The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on screen manual E Note Click YM to close or display the My Manual pane 3 Register the document to My Manual Click Add The title of the currently displayed document is added to List of My Manual E8 Note You can also add documents to My Manual by the following methods If you add a document to My Manual a yy mark is displayed in the document icons in the contents pane From the Recently Displayed Documents list double click the document title that you want to add to My Manual or select the document and press Enter key to display the title and then click Add Right click the document title displayed in the contents pane or right click the explanation window and then select Add to My Manual from the right click me
129. as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software About tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for the Windows Page top Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord Page 458 of 468 pages AJda Si Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord U516 Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord To unplug the power cord follow the procedure below P important When you unplug the power cord press the ON button then confirm that the POWER lamp is off Unplugging the power cord while the printer is still on may cause drying or clogging of the Print Head and print quality may be reduced 1 Press the ON button to turn the printer off 2 Confirm that the POWER lamp is off 3 Unplug the power cord LS i The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use Page top Sharing the Printer on a Network Page 459 of 468 pages AJAS S Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network P042 Sharing the Printer on a Network When multiple computers are being used in the network environment you can share the printer connected to one computer with the other computers The Windows versions of the computers connected to the network do not necessarily have to be the same LA LA Cent PC Client PC Client PC e Settings on Print Server The procedure for
130. ases due to added images you cannot add images beyond page 400 For PREMIUM Contents Print images cannot be added when there is no unused layout frame in the selected layout Adding Photos Page 227 of 468 pages ES Note Inthe Add Image dialog box you can select all images at one time or change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Page top Swapping Positions of Photos Page 228 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Swapping Positions of Photos 4 s3 i Easy PhotoPrint EX E S S it A083 Swapping Positions of Photos You can swap the positions of images Click Swap Image Positions in the Edit screen EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Swan patars Of Two mages n The aU Select target and sauce Mages GB Sea Posters WE SS BN Edit Tools BAHE aleae Be Select the target and source images you want to swap then click Swap When you finish swapping all images you want to swap click Back to Edit Page top Replacing Photos AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Replacing Photos A084 Page 229 of 46
131. ate Disable ICM required from the application software E Disable the color profile setting of the application software _ E Dsable the paper source setting of the application software Unt of Part Data Processing Recommended CE Cae Cee ae Note When the XPS printer driver is used certain functions are not available 3 Change the individual settings If necessary change the setting of each item and then click OK The Page Setup tab is displayed again Changing the Print Options Page 373 of 468 pages Page top Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page 374 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile P417 Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows Registering a Printing Profile 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set the necessary items From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab select the printing profile to be used and if necessary change the settings after Additional Features You can also register necessary items on the Main Page Setup and Effects tabs EA Note Effects tab cannot be used when the
132. ating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click Import to Inside Pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click ta Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click S Delete All Imported Images Selecting a Photo E Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Page 120 of 468 pages Editing Page 121 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Editing A044 Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears Ede candar as needed Insert taxt add mages or change layout Edit Toots Inside Pages 2 gt Ra eal aa ea a mp gt a a eE E General Tools A gt e X 2 Edit the calendar if necessary Changing Layout Changing Background m Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos
133. ation Reducing Photo Noise Page 326 of 468 pages How to Use This Manual Printing This Manual Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode Performing Maintenance from a Computer Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position Checking the Print Head Nozzles Cleaning Inside the Printer Overview of the Printer Driver Canon lJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon lJ Preview Updating the Printer Drivers Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Appendix Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Deleting the Undesired Print Job Sharing the Printer on a Network Canon IJ Printer Driver Page 327 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver P025 Canon lJ Printer Driver The Canon lJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this printer The Canon lJ printer drive
134. ation on the printable side Page top Lines Are Misaligned Page 399 of 468 pages Advanced Gitels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Lines Are Misaligned U315 Lines Are Misaligned D e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform Print Head Alignment If the Print Head is misaligned in installing it straight lines may be printed misaligned Be sure to align the Print Head after you install it m Routine Maintenance E8 Note f the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment Page top Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially Page 400 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially U152 Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially e Check 1 Is the size of the print data extremely large Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet Then select the Prevent loss of print data check box in the displayed dialog e Check 2 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used thin lines may not be printed Follow the instructions in Check 1 or try thickening the lines in the document
135. below e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers e If you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e f you are using Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes The Devices and Printers window Windows 7 or Printers window Windows Vista or Printers and Faxes window Windows XP is displayed Click the icon for the model name of printer to be shared e f you are using Windows 7 press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Printer properties gt Sharing tab from the displayed File menu e f you are using Windows Vista press the Alt key on your keyboard and then select Run as administrator gt Sharing from the displayed File menu e f you are using Windows XP select Sharing from the File menu P important In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when starting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Yes or Continue Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning E Note Windows XP may display a messa
136. ble Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it the print results may become coarse Page top Page 271 of 468 pages Booklet Printing Advanced Guide Page 272 of 468 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Booklet Printing P402 Booklet Printing The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet Data is printed on both sides of the paper This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly in page number order when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set booklet printing Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window TR crack Senp E Man 33 Page Setup gf Efecte Aj Martenance E Pope Ste eas 4 Orientation la Potrat A Langecope Rotate 180 degrees BD Prea Poper Sze Letter 35x11 z Long ade saping Left id se wY Sons alt gt 199 y i Part tom Last Page Colste Pag Options Stamp Bacoreund Detauts Cox hoa to ete 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list 4 Set the margin for stapling and
137. blem with any of the workarounds in this chapter please contact the seller of the printer or the service center Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers A Caution If the printer emits any unusual sound smoke or odor turn it off immediately Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center Never attempt to repair or disassemble the printer yourself a Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the printer will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired Before contacting the service center confirm the following e Product name Your printer s name is located on the front cover of the setup manual e Serial number please refer to the setup manual e Details of the problem e What you tried to solve the problem and what happened Page top FAQs Page 435 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt FAQs U340 FAQs sb No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected m Cannot Install the Printer Driver Printing Does Not Start s gt Printing Stops Before It Is Completed s gt Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Print Results Not Satisfactory Paper Jams s Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page top Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 436 of 468 pages Nelizinesel Guide Advanced
138. box To display the Adjust dialog box click Adjust Print Area Print Position You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ot Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Page 204 of 468 pages Printing Vivid Photos Page 205 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Vivid Photos A071 Printing Vivid Photos Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing Exif Print IES sisi UV wie Prato EJ Proto Nose Reducten pi P important This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box EE Note Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox this effect applies only to the print result The original image or preview image will not be affected Page top Reducing Photo Noise Page 206 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Reducing Photo Noise A072 Reducing Photo Noise When a photo is taken in a dark location such as
139. box and start printing another printable disc printing may start without the printable disc loaded Selecting the check box prevents the Disc Tray from getting dirty Disc Tray Jammed Cannot Print on the Disc Label Page 347 of 468 pages Pull out the Disc Tray gently If the Disc Tray cannot be pulled out turn the printer off then turn the printer back on again The Disc Tray will automatically be ejected When the Disc Tray is pulled out place the Disc Tray G is on the upper side again then retry printing Place the printable disc properly m Attaching Removing the Disc Tray If the Disc Tray is still jammed check if there is a problem with the printable disc Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Page 348 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page top Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 349 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device gt Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings
140. cemerns N the resting screen gd 219 j Sor by Date a E eio f amp Lovrares EN Comoe Ss Nedeork DHGODOD_s jog INGO001_sJ99 Y gP Front Cover 0 1 Inside Pages 0 enape s 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures P important f Easy PhotoPrint EX is started from another application MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser EX the folder tree area will not be displayed The images selected in the application will be displayed as thumbnails EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet s gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites 3 Select the image s you want to print and click one of the buttons below To print on the front cover click w Import to Front Cover To print on the inside pages click ke Import to Inside Pages To print on the back cover click a Import to Back Cover Selecting a Photo Page 108 of 468 pages The selected image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area E Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click E Delete Imported I
141. ck Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e Ifthe problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 5 When using paper with one printable surface make sure that No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 398 of 468 pages the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed inform
142. corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to enhance from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Auto Enhancement 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 171 of 468 pages 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing 5 Click OK Skin is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note m Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation a lf you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Enhancement 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Digital Face Smoothing 90 Digtal Face Smocthing E O e Weak ij Stong Specify the uea you wart to comect 29 Blemish Remover Note a Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to e
143. corrected enhanced images displayed in the thumbnail list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window Manual Tab There are two menus on the Manual tab Adjust and Correct Enhance Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast or to sharpen the entire image Use Correct Enhance to correct enhance specific areas Adjust Manunl a eaeevemeee Brighter CA Uters UserName samph03 jpg Selected 3 Brightness Adjusts the overall image brightness Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Sharpness Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image Adjust the sharpness when the photo is out of focus or text is blurred Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image Blur Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image Move the slider to the right to soften the image Show through Removal Correct Enhance Images Window Page 180 of 468 pages Removes show through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color Adjust the show through level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document from appearing on the image Move the slider to the right to increase the show through removal effect Advanc
144. corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Face Sharpener Function Page 167 of 468 pages Advanced Guitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Face Sharpener Function A063 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Face Sharpener Function You can sharpen out of focus faces in a photo You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears c Enh e Images rns 4 a SVE reed RedEye Conection 29 Face Shypene oS Dipta Face Smoothing E CA Users UserName gilandilewerjpg Selected 3 E8 Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window The image appears in Preview E8 Note f only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview Auto Correction 3 Make sure that Auto is selected Using the Face Sharpener Function 4 Click F
145. cting a Photo Page 151 of 468 pages Welles Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Premium Content gt Selecting a Photo A183 Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting a Photo P important The Select Images screen is not displayed depending on the selected content In that case skip ahead to Editing 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears nlle Sort by Date a PREMIUM Contents images x Insert images here E8 Note Inthe actual screen images are displayed instead of the gray area shown above 2 Select PREMIUM Contents Images or Local Images for View EA Note View does not appear depending on the selected content 3 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures E8 Note The folder tree area is displayed only when Local Images are available You can also use still images captured from videos depending on the selected content Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet depending on the selected content gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Selecting a Photo Page 152 of 468 pages 4 Select the image s you want to print and click PRG Import to Inside Pages The selecte
146. d at the specified brightness Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method gt Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Intensity Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Intensity P019 Adjusting Intensity You can dilute brighten or intensify darken the colors of the overall image data during printing The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed No adjustment Higher intensity The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 2 Open the printer driver setup window Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity on the Main tab and click Set f a Canon iP 800 series Printing Preferences DR Caick Setup Man 13 Page Setup of Efecte Aj Martenance Meda Type Plan Paper z Paper Source Atanacak Seoci Prt Quanity Hah 5 Sade a Fag Pian Paper Leter 8 511 215 2279 4eem Preview before parting
147. d image s is are displayed in the selected image area You can also select the image s you want to print by dragging it them into the selected image area Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click a Delete Imported Image aud To delete all images from the selected image area click Delete All Imported Images EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing depending on the selected content s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 153 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Premium Content gt Editing A184 Easy PhotoPrint EX Editing P important The Edit screen is not displayed depending on the selected content In that case skip ahead to Printing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears AIS Inthe actual screen the content you are creating is displayed instead of the gray areas shown above 2 Edit the content if necessary EA Note Available editing functions vary depending on the selected content m Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos s gt Replacing Photos sb Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Adding Text to Photos P important Editing Page 15
148. d then click Next EA Note m If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server It may take some time for the icon for the printer to appear 4 Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish e f you are using Windows 7 the icon for the shared printer will be created in the Devices and Printers window e f you are using Windows Vista the icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers window The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network If you are using Windows XP 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems For installation instructions see Installing the Printer Driver EA Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation Settings on Client PC Page 462 of 468 pages 2 Start the wizard Select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes gt Add a printer When Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard screen appears click Next Add a printer Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer then click Next On the Specify a Printer window click Next and then search for the print server system Click the icon for the printer that you have config
149. de the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the envelopes Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The envelopes may not be fed properly 4 B C B Rear side C Address side ES Note Do not load envelopes higher than the Load Limit Mark D 3 Specify the settings with the printer driver 1 Select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup sheet 2 Select DL Env or Comm Env 10 in the Envelope Size Setting window 3 Select Landscape in Orientation gt Important If you do not specify the envelope size or orientation properly the address will be printed upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees E8 Note If the print result is upside down open the printer driver setup window select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings then select the Rotate 180 degrees check box in Additional Features For details on the printer driver settings see Printing Documents Page 34 of 468 pages Loading Envelopes Page 35 of 468 pages O A Page top Media Types You Can Use Page 36 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Can Use C075 m Media Types You Can Use Choose paper suitable for printing for the best print results Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing yo
150. ded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 5 Clean the Print Head deeply 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Deep Cleaning r n ap Canan PABO usec Prirting Preteweces r a a er Ceanng Bonon Pane Sear Deam svom rm ord bern n z Puvem sev uim dro sres me rt wee wees erro Poker Jeary ent amh eee Pys oao arrg s Ran ga Cut Mode Thione Ay agv smsen o Aamatniaiy Satma he cad oe art eater Came sarga QI Mors sauna aec cpt asmone youre Wow Pete jame ame os ros na 3 Select the ink group to clean deeply E9 Note This printer has two kinds of black ink PGBK pigment ink and BK dye ink Check the nozzle check pattern then click Black if there are missing lines in PGBK or click Color if there are horizontal white streaks in BK For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click Execute Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 58 of 468 pages EA Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head deeply r a osa m Linds misme Bad amrni be iamm boy gda away Aim Da damy eww ada aaie al dad md Aid i Fe Pm beet merran harem bnew ca etage Croce rod Qsc ea 4 5 Confirm the message
151. deos Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos s gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Printing Stickers Page 126 of 468 pages Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 127 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A051 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seler the Rem you want to create fom the menu Select Lorry to access saved tems Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 128 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A052 Se Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Stickers from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty paser sze etc ni General Settings then select a Byout After spectying paper Sze etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Se
152. der before printing Page top Fit to Page Printing Page 262 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Fit to Page Printing P004 Fit to Page Printing Festival The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set fit to page printing Select Fit to Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab El Page Sze Letier 85x117 pi a Onertation A Pora A Langecape T Rotate 180 degrees BD Prea Paper Sze Later 85x11 z a BD H 3 g Pian Paper ere Leter 85x11 21581279 dem Nome Bordotess Saki Fapiant 1 E _ J Aona Prrt Area Setup Staple Sde Long side stapling Leh Specty Margin 1 gt lt S7 i E Pert tore Last Page Colste Pact Options Stamp Background Oetauts ok cone top Hee 3 Select the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged Fi
153. dialog box that appears after printing the nozzle check pattern See When cleaning is required the printer starts cleaning the Print Head Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized paper are loaded in the Cassette then go to 3 in step 5 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 5 Clean the Print Head 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Cleaning Cleaning the Print Head Page 56 of 468 pages rc om Cason PADOL cess Prtiag Petewence MAA iain e ai hva Aboma ns ho a Po adi poem atir ga Dat Mote Mowe yout maca te apan Nae fk imi cr Des sara Alora you to atect opemmon ostona L 3 Select the ink group to clean E9 Note This printer has two kinds of black ink PGBK pigment ink and BK dye ink Check the nozzle check pattern then click Black if there are missing lines in PGBK or click Color if there are horizontal white streaks in BK For details on the nozzle check pattern see Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern 4 Click Execute The printer starts cleaning the Print Head when the POWER lamp starts flashing green Do not perform any other operat
154. dow 2 Specify the number of copies to be printed For Copies on the Page Setup tab specify the number of copies to be printed DR ak Setup E Man 5B Page Sero gf Btects Ai Martenance El Page Sze Letter 3511 Ei a Onereation A Porat A ungepe P Rotge 180 degrees B Same os Page Size Page Layout Noenslsine 222332 FetoPage Page Layout Pian Paper Letter 8 5 11 215 2279 deem m T Automatically reduce large document that the perter carr output Oupley Preting Atoma Pret Area Setup Staple Sde Long side stapling Lett Spectr Marge Copies oe 1 995 _ 38 i E Port iom Lan Pogo Di Colste Pag Options Samp Backgrund Detauts Cmca doer o 3 Specify the print order Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order and uncheck the check box when you want to print from the first page Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print out all pages in each copy together Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with the same page number together e Print from Last Page Collate e Print from Last Page W Collate Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order 4 gt Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing
155. e For details on how to place the Disc Tray see Attaching Removing the Disc Tray e Check 3 If disc label printing stops before it is complete try the operation again If a certain period of time has elapsed while disc label printing is in progress the printer stops initializing The printer resumes initializing by pressing the RESUME CANCEL button Try the operation again following the on screen instructions Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Is the Disc Tray placed properly Properly place the Disc Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the Disc Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the Disc Tray see Attaching Removing the Disc Tray e Check 2 Unrecognizable printable disc may be placed Canon recommends that you use printable discs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer e Check 3 Is the printable disc on the Disc Tray already printed If you place a printable disc on which has already been printed on the Disc Tray the Disc Tray may be ejected In this case try printing again after clearing the Detects a printable disc in the disc tray check box in Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab in the printer driver and clicking Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the disc tray check box and click Send EA Note If you left cleared Detects a printable disc in the disc tray check
156. e Photo Suckers Prez date Date Settings Orentaton A Portrar AJ Lancscape Use the same mage n al frames 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date Use the same image in all frames EA Note Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings dialog box select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the frames on the page Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen 9 Page top Selecting a Photo Page 129 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Selecting a Photo A053 PN Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Select roges for stekers You Can ako add replace rrapes ater n the eating orocess To comest or enhance mages cick the Comect Enhance button AOON Corrections and enhancements N the resuting screen gg 7 alg a a Sor by Date a BB too amp Lorares Ae 1 Coroner E Network Rab es D4G0012_sjo9 1NG0009_sJ99 D4G0002_sio9 2 Select the folder that contains the image you w
157. e 433 of 468 pages PREMIUM Install Easy PhotoPrint EX select the printing menu of the contents on Solution Menu EX then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM e Check 2 Did you download and install the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Before printing the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM download and install the contents onto your computer then start printing again The contents will not be displayed if the number of copies exceeds the printing limit or the validity term has expired Access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM to check the printing limit or validity term of each content e Check 3 Are you trying to print contents which need a larger size of paper than the printer can support If you are trying to print contents which need a larger size of paper than the printer can support an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen then confirm the paper size suitable for the contents e Check 4 Are the ink tanks installed properly If genuine Canon ink tanks are not installed properly an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 5 Are any operations in progress on the printer If any operations are in progress on the printer an error message is displayed on the computer screen Foll
158. e Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box To display the Adjust Print Position dialog box click Print Position You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced 3 Click Print Note Printing Page 133 of 468 pages See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Q Page top Printing Layout Page 134 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout A150 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Layout You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts SAPEN CEN onthobea chi Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Changing Layout Adding Photos s gt Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Printing Dates on Photos s Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving sb Opening Saved Fi
159. e User Name the creation date time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text If necessary change the settings of TrueType Font Style Size and Outline You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color P important Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date Time User Name is selected e Placement tab Select the stamp position from the Position list You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X Position and Y Position You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window To change the stamp position angle type a value in the Orientation box directly 5 Save the stamp Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box and then click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 6 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings 1 Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed Registering a Stamp Page 282 of 468 pages Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp Background Stamp dialog box and then select the title of the stamp to be changed from the Stamp list 2 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens 3 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window 4 Overwrite save the stamp Click Save overwrite on the Save sett
160. e application Click Search backgrounds to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free a Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds When Single color Is Selected Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK i Change Background xm Background Type Select from samples Single color Image file No background Backaround Color Standard color LI l Custom color Customize _ Apply to all pages When Image file Is Selected Set Image File Path and Image Layout then click OK Page 224 of 468 pages Changing Background Page 225 of 468 pages Select from samples Single color Image file No background Imace File Path eS C Users UserName IMGO032_s jpa E Semitransparent Transparency 10 10 90 image Layout Crop to fit pace Auto scale to ft page Tile Original size Note See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box Page top Adding Photos Page 226 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Adding Photos A082 HEES Era SS Adding Photos You can add images to pages Select the page you want
161. e layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Changing Layout Page 222 of 468 pages Page top Changing Background Page 223 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Background A081 Easy PhotoPrint EX O Changing Background You can change the background of each page P important You cannot change the background of the Stickers Layout Print and PREMIUM Contents Print Click Background in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in the Edit screen then click kaj Change Background Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Select from samples Single color Image fle No background Edit Took ganm amaa sane DE Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box When Select from samples Is Selected Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK ES Note Changing Background Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in th
162. e print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes The documents that are currently displayed are printed Print Selected Documents You can select and print the documents that you want to print 1 From Select Target select Selected Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select and check the title check boxes of the documents to be printed Note When you select the Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies check box the check boxes of all document titles found in the lower hierarchies are selected Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 4 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 5 Execute print Page 80 of 468 pages Printing This Manual Page 81 of 468 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print My Manual You can select and print documents registered in My Manual For details about My Manual see Reg
163. e print the document will be divided into several pages during printing After all poster pages have been printed paste the pages together to create a poster Printing Only Specific Pages If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing you can reprint only the specific pages by following the procedure below 1 Set the print range In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab click the pages that do not need to be printed The pages that were clicked are deleted and only the pages to be printed are displayed Poster Printing TR aak Setup lt gt Main P Page Sete of Efecte Al El Page Sre amp Orientation lA A Porter Poper Sze Page Layout Poster Yo Pin Paper Poster Lemer B 5 x11 215 279 der Bordelees Fitofage Scaled Fane Laynt 1 m Ouples Parting Atomatic Area Se Long ade stapling Left 1 Cons 1 gt 0 99 Martenance Lotier 85x117 O Porat A Landrcape Rotate 180 degrees Letter 8 5711 a B Colste EA Note Cox ca ioy Hep Click the deleted pages to display them again Right click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages 2 Complete the setup After completing the page selection click OK When you execute print only specified pages will be printed P important When Poster is selected the Duplex Printing Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed out and are unavaila
164. e required permission of way to use the work from copyright holder when using the work of others except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Please check the details carefully of the web page of work in the photo sharing site Please also check terms of service in the photo sharing site before using the work of others Canon is not responsible for the any copyright problems by using this function This function is supported under Windows XP or later This product uses the Flickr API but is not endorsed or certified by Flickr 1 In the Select Images screen click ce Import photos from photo sharing sites The Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window appears Selected 10 image s Search Rests 0 image s RE Note You can also display the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window by clicking 4 Import photos from photo sharing sites in the Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Page 192 of 468 pages When you click Import photos from photo sharing sites a message about created works and personality rights appear To hide the message select the Do not show this message again checkbox See Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window for details on the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sit
165. eA poot reom od bee meam eee Dese aan bee adm A ranee he mare w mase cere 3 Select the paper source to clean Rear Tray or Cassette 4 Click OK Rotter Omin eg el eee Sates fhe teres cares weeny ton ears od eT OK 5e Te 3 Covet 4 5 Clean the Paper Feed Roller without paper 1 Follow the message to remove paper in the paper source you selected in 3 of step 4 Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 62 of 468 pages 2 Click OK The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it is cleaned 6 Clean the Paper Feed Roller with paper 1 Make sure that the Paper Feed Roller has stopped rotating then follow the message to load three or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the paper source you selected in 3 of step 4 2 Confirm the message and click OK The printer starts cleaning The cleaning will be completed after the paper is ejected Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the cleaning of the Paper Feed Roller 3 When the completion message appears click OK If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller in the Rear Tray turn off the power disconnect the power plug then wipe the Paper Feed Roller A located in the center inside the Rear Tray with a moistened cotton swab or the like Rotate the roller manually in the direction of the arrow B as you clean it Do not touch the roller with your fingers rotate it w
166. eck Pattern 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 5 Print the nozzle check pattern 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Nozzle Check Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 52 of 468 pages a Canon PAB00 nies Printing Prateneces ERA E Crane Bonon Pane Seareg Petes mean adie n Perverts paper muto Guang Pre preg meam eet Dess Geemrg Tou ewro o Unings rasim the eavet be sinew P tee ee Weer cers ror werg Pre teed Migrant 0 m fantom prod ani yaent aem Trate prin A Cem oa wen Als hem amp Mima yas bo wt ba ati poem sate ge b eet Mode E a aiman me paang ne be raga dms atara Case Sanga Moma you gt eeect peaton oston parame vee hete poe Ami Los Gore ne 3 Confirm the message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern EA Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before printing the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Chec
167. ed Opens the Advanced Adjustment dialog box in which you can make fine adjustments to the image brightness and color tone For Brightness Contrast and Tone select a color in Channel to adjust either Red Green or Blue or select Master to adjust three colors together Advanced Adjuitnent Chanel Master l Bigtine Brightness Contrast Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image Move the Brightness slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image Move the Contrast slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image Tone Adjust the brightness balance by specifying Highlight the brightest level Shadow the darkest level and Midtone the color in the middle of Highlight and Shadow Move the Highlight slider to the left to brighten the image Move the Midtone slider to the left to brighten and right to darken the image Move the Shadow slider to the right to darken the image Color Balance Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image Move the Color Balance slider to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color Note These are complementary color pairs each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors
168. eleted Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab 2 Delete the printing profile Click Delete When the confirmation message appears click OK The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list Note Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted Page top Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper Page 376 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper P032 Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper When you select Automatically Select from Paper Source you can use the printer driver to select the paper source for plain paper The procedure for setting the paper source is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper 2 Click Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper on the Maintenance tab The Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper dialog box opens EA Note f the printer is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 Transmit the settings Select the paper source for plain paper and then click the Send button The selected settings are enabled herea
169. elopes before printing Once you have prepared the envelopes load them in portrait orientation If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation they will not feed properly Check 4 Confirm the paper source setting If the paper source setting is not changed since you purchased this printer the paper source for plain paper is the Cassette e Setting with the printer driver Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose e For information on the paper source for plain paper when the Paper Source on the printer driver is set to Automatically Select gt Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper e Check 5 Remove the foreign object in the Cassette e Check 6 Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear Paper Does Not Feed Properly e e e Tray If the paper tears in the Rear Tray see Paper Jams to remove it If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the printer unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object Check 7 Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed completely Paper does not feed properly if the Inner Cover is even slightly open gt Overview of the Printer Check 8 Clean the Paper Feed Roller gt Routine Maintenance EE Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary Check 9 If two or more sheets of paper feed from the Cassette at once clean the inside of t
170. emaining Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon lJ Status Monitor 1 Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar The Canon lJ Status Monitor appears 2 Display the print jobs Click Display Print Queue The print queue window opens 3 Delete the print jobs Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu When the confirmation message appears click Yes The deletion of the print job is complete P important Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user E9 Note When you perform this operation all print jobs are deleted If the print queue list contained a necessary print job start the printing process over from the beginning Page top Interpreting the ICC Profile Page 447 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Interpreting the ICC Profile P049 Interpreting the ICC Profile When you need to specify the printer profile select the ICC profile for the paper to print on The ICC profiles installed for this printer appear as follows Canon XXXXX PR 1 r e Ll 1 2 3 e 1 is the model name of the printer e 2 is the media type This notation corresponds to the following media type GL
171. ent service available exclusively to users of genuine Canon inks for this printer Make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors Starting Various Software Applications Page 19 of 468 pages Help amp Settings View the Solution Menu EX online help or the on screen manual of the printer Set up Solution Menu EX or the printer Start Application Start the supplied software applications such as Easy PhotoPrint EX and My Printer With My Printer you can display the printer driver setup window and get information on what action to take if you have trouble with the operation Online Shopping Purchase consumables such as ink from the website Information Find useful information on the printer EA Note The computer must be connected to the Internet to access the website for useful information etc For details on operating Solution Menu EX refer to the online help Select the Help amp Settings menu then click Solution Menu EX s Help to view the online help Starting Software Applications from Solution Menu EX From Solution Menu EX you can start a software application and also directly access a function of the software application The following procedure is to start Solution Menu EX and for example select one of the Easy PhotoPrint EX functions Photo Print 1 Start Solution Menu EX Double click 3 Solution Menu EX on the desktop 4 Click Here Solution Menu EX E9 Note
172. eral tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device If a device error is displayed refer to Windows help to resolve the error Other Error Messages e Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor check the following Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory Quit other running application softwares to increase available memory If you still cannot print restart your computer and retry printing e Printer driver could not be found Uninstall the printer driver according to the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver and then reinstall it e Could not print Application name File name Try printing again once the current job is complete The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed If the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is installed a confirmation screen asking for permission to send the printer and application software usage information will be displayed one month three months and then six months after the installation After that it will be displayed every six months for about four years Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below GT EA E ren a w Thank you for your cooperation in Ink
173. es Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Simulating an Illustration Representing Image Data with a Single Color Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Smoothing Jagged Outlines Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Reducing Photo Noise Overview of the Printer Driver Printer Driver Operations Canon lJ Printer Driver XPS Printer Driver How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Maintenance Tab iP4800 series Advanced Guide Page 74 of 468 pages Canon lJ Status Monitor Canon lJ Preview Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge Compliant Device About PictBridge Print Settings Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an Error Occurs The Printer Cannot Be Powered On Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Cannot Install the Printer Driver Cannot Install the Application Program Easy WebPrint EX Does Not Start up or Easy WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing Speed Is Slow Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed Print Results Not Satisfactory Cannot Print to End of Job Part of the Page Is Not Printed No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wron
174. es before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once select the Apply to all images checkbox Manual Correction 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Red Eye Correction LS RedEye Comection Er R e Weak lt p Steen Surround a red area to speciy the ares you went to conect 992 Face Shutpernt oS Digtal Face Smoothing 29 Blerrith Remover Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red Eye Correction Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Paintbrush 5 Drag to select the red area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image Using the Red Eye Correction Function Page 163 of 468 pages Red eye is corrected and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected im
175. es window 2 Enter the search text in Search 3 Set Sort by Number of Results per Page and License Type 4 Click Start Search Search starts then the images that match the search text appear in the Thumbnail window P important Some images such as images in formats other than JPEG do not appear E Note Click q Back to the previous page to display the previous page Click b gt Go to the next page to display the next page Alternatively enter a page number in the page number entry box and click View to display the page The number of search results images may be small depending on the language of the search text In that case entering English search text may increase search results 5 Select the image s you want to download The selected image s is are displayed in the Selections area E Note You can N seleci up to 300 images Click LXi i Cancel all image selections to cancel all image selections in the Selections area Click i i Cancel i image selection to cancel the selection of images selected in the Selections area 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save Selected Images When the Save Selected Image Save Selected Images dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save The selected images are saved EA Note To save only the images you like select them in the Selections area and click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save Selected Images On
176. et Layout to Borderless e Fast Photo Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT 101 e Plain A4 Letter When Paper type is set to Plain borderless printing will be disabled even when Layout is set to Borderless Layout Default Borderless Index Bordered Borderless N up 2 4 9 16 1 20 up 2 35 up 3 1 Layout compatible with A4 or Letter sized paper and Canon brand sticker above A4 Letter 4 up Photo Stickers 2 up 4 up 9 up 16 up 2 With a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device selecting items with i mark allows you to print shooting info Exif Data in list format 20 up or on the margins of the specified data 1 up May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices 3 Printed in 35 mm Film Style Layout Contact Printing Layout Available only with a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device May not be available with some Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Print date amp Default Off No printing Date File No Both Off file no Image Default 1 On Exif Print Off NR Noise Reduction 2 VIVID 2 Face 2 Red Eye 2 optimize 1 Photos are optimized for printing using the Photo optimizer pro function 2 Can be selected only on certain Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices About PictBridge Print Settings Page 353 of 468 pages May not be selected depending on the device Trimming Default Off No trimming On follow the camera s setting Off Page top Mai
177. etails on ink lamp flashing speed see Checking the Ink Status 4 Prepare the new ink tank 1 Take a new ink tank out of its package remove the orange tape 0 completely then remove the protective film 0 completely Replacing an Ink Tank gt Important Handle the ink tanks carefully Do not drop or apply excessive pressure to them If the orange tape remains on the L shape air hole D ink may splash or the printer may not print properly 2 Hold the ink tank with the orange protective cap E pointing up while being careful not to block the L shape air hole D E 3 Slowly twist the orange protective cap E 90 degrees horizontally to remove it off gt Important Page 44 of 468 pages Replacing an Ink Tank Do not push the sides of the ink tank If you push the sides of the ink tank with the L shape air hole D blocked ink may splash Do not touch the inside of the orange protective cap E or the open ink port F The ink may stain your hands if you touch them Do not reattach the protective cap E once you have removed it Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables 5 Install the new ink tank 1 Insert the front end of ink tank into the Print Head at a slant Make sure that the position of the ink tank matches the label 2 Press the mark Push on the ink tank until the ink tank snaps firmly into place Make sure that
178. even when printing in black and white Why does the printer have two black ink tanks There are two kinds of black ink in the printer dye ink BK and pigment ink PGBk The dye ink is used mainly for printing photos illustration etc and the pigment ink is used for text based documents Each has different purposes so that even if one runs out another will not be used instead If either of them runs out the ink tank replacement is required These two inks are automatically used depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver You cannot change the usage of these inks yourself Ink lamp indicates when ink is running low The inside of the ink tank consists of A the part where ink is preserved and B the sponge with absorbed ink 4 A H B When the ink A runs out the ink lamp flashes slowly to indicate that the ink is running low Then when the ink B runs out the ink lamp flashes fast to indicate that the ink needs to be replaced with a new one See Replacing an Ink Tank m Printing on special paper How to print with optimal quality Tip Check the printer status before printing e Is the Print Head ok If print head nozzles are clogged print will be faint and papers will be wasted Print the nozzle check pattern to check the Print Head See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect e Is the inside of the printer smeared with ink Tips on How to Use Your Pri
179. f the printer is placed closer to those it may not be able to work properly due to fluorescent noises m How to maintain the optimal printing quality The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the Print Head from drying or clogging Always follow the following steps for optimal printing quality e Follow the procedure below to disconnect the power plug 1 Press the ON button on the printer to turn it off 2 Make sure that the POWER lamp is not lit 3 Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet If you press the ON button to turn off the power the printer caps the Print Head nozzles automatically to prevent from drying If you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before the POWER lamp is turned off the Print Head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging To disconnect the power plug be sure to follow this procedure e Print periodically Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time even if it is capped the Print Head too may become dried or clogged if the printer has not been used for a long time We recommend you to use the printer at least once a month E9 Note Tips on How to Use Your Printer Depending on the type of paper ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint stick or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area m Lamp on the printer is flashing
180. feed roller and paper is not fed properly The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows z Roller Cleaning Prepare the printer Remove all sheets of paper from the paper source from which paper could not be properly fed 2 Open the printer driver setup window gt Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Roller Cleaning dialog box opens 4 Select Rear Tray or Cassette and click OK The confirmation message appears oi Execute paper feed roller cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and click OK Paper feed roller cleaning starts 6 Complete paper feed roller cleaning After the rollers have stopped follow the instruction in the message load three sheets of plain paper into the selected paper source of the printer and click OK Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed Page top Aligning the Print Head Position Page 363 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Aligning the Print Head Position P028 Aligning the Print Head Position Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines This printer supports two head alignment methods automatic head alignment and manual head alignment Normally the printer is set for automatic head alignment If the printing results of automatic print head alignment
181. forming Deep Cleaning Execute deep cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute Click OK when the confirmation message appears Print head deep cleaning starts Complete deep cleaning Cleaning the Print Heads Page 361 of 468 pages The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message 5 Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel P important Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer s ink supply Consequently perform cleaning only when necessary Note If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning switch off the printer wait 24 hours and then perform Deep Cleaning again If there is still no sign of improvement the ink may have run out or the print head may be worn For details on the remedial action to be taken see Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Related Topic s Checking the Print Head Nozzles Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Page 362 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers P027 Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Cleans the paper feed roller Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the paper
182. from a function of Easy PhotoPrint EX The saved still images can be used along with other images to create albums calendars etc in Easy PhotoPrint EX Page top Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Page 186 of 468 pages Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating Still Images from Videos gt Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window A161 Easy PhotoPrint EX Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window You can capture video frames and create still images in these windows In the Movie Print window you can print the captured still images P important This function is supported under Windows XP or later However it is not supported under the 64 bit editions of Windows XP This function is not available when ZoomBrowser EX Ver 6 5 or later Supplied with Canon digital cameras supporting MOV format video recording is not installed When the color tone of a video is changed via the settings of the graphic driver video card or its utility such a change is not reflected in still images captured from the video Therefore color tones may differ between videos and captured still images To display the Video Frame Capture window click J Capture frames from video in the Select Images screen or Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add al Add Image To display the Movie Print window select Photo Print in Solution
183. fter P important The descriptions in the printer manual assume that the plain paper is supplied from the cassette When you change the paper source setting replace all instances of cassette with the new paper source Page top Managing the Printer Power Page 377 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Managing the Printer Power P414 Managing the Printer Power This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows Power Off The Power Off function turns off the printer When you use this function you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Execute power off Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab When the confirmation message appears click OK The printer power switches off and the Maintenance tab is displayed again ___ Auto Power The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when print data has not been received from the computer for a specified period of time The Auto Power On function automatically turns on the printer upon reception of print data 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Make sure that the printer is on and then click Auto Power on the Maintenance tab The Auto Power Settings dialog box opens EA Note Ifthe pr
184. g White Streaks Lines Are Misaligned Line or Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Back of the Paper Is Smudged Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Printing Does Not Start Printing Stops Before It Is Completed Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Paper Does Not Feed Properly Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver Paper Jams Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray iP4800 series Advanced Guide Page 75 of 468 pages Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing In Other Cases Message Appears on the Computer Screen Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed Writing Err
185. g on images the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect Page top Reducing Photo Noise Page 323 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Reducing Photo Noise P024 Reducing Photo Noise This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used With the Photo Noise Reduction function you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the image quality of the digital print The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Photo Noise Reduction Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the level 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced Reducing Photo Noise Page 324 of 468 pages E Note It is recommended to select Normal for most cases Select Strong if you have selected Normal and the noise still bothers you Depending on application software or resolution of image data effects of digital camera noise reduction may not be obvious When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras image may be distorted Page top Overview of the Printer Driver Page 325 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt
186. ge 279 of 468 pages 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified background P important When Borderless is selected the Stamp Background Stamp button appears grayed out and is unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing Related Topics Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page top Registering a Stamp Page 280 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering a Stamp P404 Registering a Stamp This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used You can create and register a new stamp You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing stamp Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows Registering a New Stamp 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab ak Semin an A Poze Seo of tects AJ Martenance El Pape Sue Leter 8 5511 o Hi a Onentation la Porat A Landreoe F Rotse 180 degrees a Same os Page Size X Pign Paper Letter 85 11 215 2279 4em Page Layout Noenals
187. ge recommending the user to use the Network Setup Wizard to set up sharing When this message appears choose not to use the wizard and then set up sharing Set sharing Select Share this printer on the Sharing tab to set a shared name if necessary and click OK The setup on the print server system is complete Next set up the client systems O Page top Settings on Client PC Page 461 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Client PC P044 Settings on Client PC After setting up the print server system set up the client system The procedure for setting up the client systems is as follows If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista 1 Install the printer driver on the client systems For installation instructions see Installing the Printer Driver EA Note During the installation a screen prompting you to turn the printer on appears Click Manual Selection and then select an appropriate port to complete your installation 2 Start the wizard e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers gt Add a printer e f you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Network gt Add Printer The Add Printer window appears 3 Add a printer Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and click the icon for the printer that you have configured on the print server system to be shared an
188. ge to be moved Next on the Edit menu select Move Page from Pages and select the appropriate item e Deleting print documents and print pages e To delete a print document select the target document from the Document Name list and on the Edit menu choose Document and then Delete Document e To delete a print page click View Thumbnails from the Option menu and select the print page to be deleted Next on the Edit menu select Delete Page from Pages After editing the print documents or print pages you can change the print settings on the Page Information Layout and Manual Color Adjustment tabs as necessary P important To display the multiple documents in the list open the preview and execute print again To return the print documents to their original condition before they were edited in the preview on the Edit menu select Reset Documents from Documents If the documents to be combined have different print settings a message may be displayed Check the contents of the displayed message before combining the documents If the documents to be combined have different output paper sizes and duplex printing or page layout printing is to be performed the printer may not produce the expected print results for certain print pages Check the preview before printing Depending on the print settings of the print document some functions may not be available in the Canon lJ XPS preview Note You can rename Document Name to any name
189. ges CHECK rissusvswcsssuo Select Album to add text and frames You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos Create calendars easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create your own calendar using your favorite photos It ll be exciting to turn the calendar pages You can also create 2 month 6 month and 12 month You can use all kinds of photos calendars Create Stickers Create stickers easily with Easy PhotoPrint EX Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends CHECK eveeveevcvveece You can add text to photos Using Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 468 of 468 pages Page top
190. grees a Sane os Page Size Page Layout Nomsisize 222332 FetoPage Page Layout Pian Paper Letter 8 S11 215 2279 4em ia F Actomatically reduce large document that the perter cannet output cij m m Oupleg Parting Atoma Prit Area Setup Stacie Sde Leng sice saping Leh _Specty Maran Sons ns 7 1 y i E Pert iom Lant Page Calste a j Cok cance Goo Eio The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens Pisce tano over tot Stamp fys page only Background Sarpie 1 Stamp Background Printing Page 278 of 468 pages With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and only the stamp function can be used 3 Select a stamp Check the Stamp check box and select the stamp to be used from the list The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the stamp details If necessary specify the following settings and then click OK Define Stamp button To change the stamp text bitmap or position click this see Registering a Stamp Place stamp over text To print the stamp on the front of the document check this check box EA Note The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap When this check box is unchecked the stamp is printed behind the document da
191. h a USB cable check the followings e f you are using a relay device such as a USB hub disconnect it connect the printer directly to the computer and try printing again If printing starts normally there is a problem with the relay device Consult the reseller of the relay device for details e There could also be a problem with the USB cable Replace the USB cable and try printing again e Check 4 Make sure that the printer driver is installed correctly Uninstall the printer driver following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver insert the Setup CD ROM into the computer s disc drive and perform Custom Install and select IJ Printer Driver to install again e Check 5 Check the status of the device on your computer Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 426 of 468 pages 1 Click Control Panel Hardware and Sound then Device Manager If the User Account Control screen is displayed follow the on screen instructions In Windows XP click Control Panel Performance and Maintenance System then click Device Manager on the Hardware sheet 2 Double click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support If USB Printing Support is not displayed make sure that the printer is correctly connected to the computer Check 3 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the printer and the computer 3 Click the Gen
192. h the current layout can be fitted f you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames any image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted starting with the last image that was added to the former layout page EE Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size Orientation or the type of page selected front cover inside pages or back cover Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly selected Changing Layout Page 221 of 468 pages Calendar Edit Tools fea 006 goara Apply to all pages alae amaa P important The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout Allimages that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page EE Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation Layout Print Edit Tools Bene 006 007 li a a E Apply to all pages Beze P important a f the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages with the current layout can be fitted EE Note Th
193. hat is preventing the Print Head Holder from moving and turn on the printer again P important Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer The printer may not print out properly if you touch it f the problem is not resolved contact the service center e Four Digit Alphanumeric and Printer error has occurred Is Displayed Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed e Check See Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing and take the appropriate action Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed e Check See Eleven flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 425 of 468 pages Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed The power cord may have been unplugged while the printer was still on Check the error message that appears on the computer then click OK The printer starts printing See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord Writing Error Output Error Communication Error e Check 1 If the POWER lamp is off make sure that the power plug is plugged in then turn the printer on While the POWER lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until
194. he Cassette For information on cleaning the inside of the Cassette refer to Routine Maintenance Check 10 Is the Rear Cover closed completely Paper may be jammed if the Rear Cover is not closed completely Push the Rear Cover until it is closed completely Refer to Overview of the Printer for the position of the Rear Cover Page top Page 416 of 468 pages a Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Dri Page 417 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver U327 Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver e Check Is the paper source setting inconsistent between the application program and the printer driver Change the application software setting corresponding to the printer driver setting or click the Print Options on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver and select Disable the paper source setting of the application software on the Print Options screen When the paper source setting is inconsistent between an application program and the printer driver the application software setting takes precedence Page top Paper Jams Page 418 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams U328 Paper Jams Note f you need to turn off the printer to remove jammed paper during printing cancel print jobs before turn
195. he Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from A096 Easy PhotoPrint EX Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from As shown below printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout Print screen Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates See your printer manual for details on how to load paper to print on the front back etc Page top How Do I Print with Even Margins Page 200 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt How Do I Print with Even Margins A097 Easy PhotoPrint EX g How Do I Print with Even Margins When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other depending on the image and printer To always print with even margins select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ot Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Crop the photo to apply even margins individually Cropping Photos Photo Print E9 Note This setting is available only when Photo Print is selected Page top What Is C1 or C4 Page 201 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Co
196. he Paper 4 Printing Try This sb Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Creating Still Images from Videos s gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites s gt Printing Labels on Discs Directly Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise s gt Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index s Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print s Printing Photo Information Saving Photos b Opening Saved Files Printing Photos Page 95 of 468 pages Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File s Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from m How Do Print with Even Margins Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 96 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A011 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Seler the Rem you want to create fom the menu Select Lorry to access saved tems Page top Selecting a Photo Page 97 of 468 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting a Photo
197. he Windows O Page top Maintenance Tab Page 330 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt Maintenance Tab P410 Maintenance Tab The Maintenance tab allows you to perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer Om Canon IPSSO0 senes Printing Preferences 7 Cesning So Emirates unmarted smudges and ines in ihe pert est by repay Gearing head norsies ore Paper Source Setting for Pian Paper NS Sets paper source for plain paper when E Paper Source is Automatically Select nyis FR ak Setup Mon 5B Page Setup of tects Ah Martenance Bottom Piste Gearing Prevents paper smudges during peirting Roller Deep Geaning Cesning Rg Unciogs norzles Put carnet be Geared Exncates pert soler deirg for smoother paper feeding Power O Part Head Aigresert i Exeates pert head signet to corea a Tums he porter of Nozzle Check Ato Power E Prrts a patem to check whether the part Allows you to set the ato power setings Caset Mode Allows you to seduce the opersting noise for night or siert stustions a Custom Setings j Allows you to select operation optonas panona View Panter gaus Roe Gos Goa Gown Geen Features Cleaning the Print Heads s gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
198. he application software you are printing from Then check the Page Size setting on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver setup window EE Note Duplex printing may not be available depending on the version of the application software e Make sure that the type of loaded paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing on the Main sheet in the printer driver setup window To switch to manual duplex printing follow the procedure below Open the printer driver setup window clear the Automatic check box on the Page Setup sheet and reprint When performing manual duplex printing note the following e f you are printing three or more pages of a document with manual duplex printing one side of all sheets of paper will be printed first Turn over the paper and reload the paper in the printer and then the reverse side of all sheets of paper will be printed Be careful not to change the order of paper in the stack e The procedure for reversing the paper varies depending on the staple side and printing orientation Follow the on screen instructions Page top For Windows Users Page 429 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt For Windows Users U333 For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed e Check Is the printer status monitor enabled Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor 1 Open the printer driver setup window
199. he number of copies appears as 1 below the clicked image while the selected image itself will appear in the selected image area EA Note To delete an image in the selected image area select the image you want to delete and click a Delete Imported Image To delete all images from the selected image area click W Delete All Imported Images To print two or more copies of an image click a Up arrow until the number of copies you want is reached To reduce the number of copies shown in the box click zj Down arrow You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Selecting the Paper Page 99 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Selecting the Paper A013 Eroon Selecting the Paper 1 Click Select Paper The Select Paper screen appears Exif Print Ml vss Prato E Shoto Nose Reduction Pace Sze 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Paper Source Paper Size Media Type Note The paper sizes and media ty
200. hether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e f the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e f the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 2 Has the ink run out Open the Top Cover then check the status of ink lamp Routine Maintenance e Check 3 Is the orange tape or protective film remaining Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the L shape air hole is exposed as illustrated in A If the orange tape is left as in B pull the orange tape and remove it Page top Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected Page 413 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Speed Is N
201. hics otherwise the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page top Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Page 420 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit U350 Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Remove the paper following the procedure below gt 1 Detach the Rear Cover 2 Pull the paper out slowly EA Note Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer m If you cannot pull the paper out turn the printer off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 3 Attach the Rear Cover Push the left side of the Rear Cover until it is closed completely gt wy If you were not able to remove the paper out in step 2 4 Remove the Cassette 5 Pull the paper out slowly Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Page 421 of 468 pages 6 If any paper is sticking out of the Cassette remove the paper align and reload the paper in the Cassette If you did not remove the jammed paper out in step 1 to 5 when automatic duplex printing check the duplex transport section m Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing EA Note
202. hotos Photo Print Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Printing Photo Information Saving Photos Opening Saved Files Other Settings Changing Layout Changing Background Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos Saving iP4800 series Advanced Guide Page 73 of 468 pages Setting Holidays Setting Calendar Display Opening Saved Files Printing with Other Application Software Various Printing Methods Printing with Easy Setup Setting a Page Size and Orientation Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order Setting the Stapling Margin Execute Borderless Printing Fit to Page Printing Scaled Printing Page Layout Printing Poster Printing Booklet Printing Duplex Printing Stamp Background Printing Registering a Stamp Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Printing an Envelope Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Displaying the Print Results before Printing Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Specifying Color Correction Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Printing with ICC Profil
203. ia Type list on the Main tab Meda Tipe Pian Paper pn 5 Sagded a Fog Pian Paper Gatom Leter 85x11 215 2279 dem Color rtensty Ago UO Geayscale Prrting Preview before parting gt F Cox 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens Printing with ICC Profiles Page 304 of 468 pages 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select None for Color Correction 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver and then Print Print from an application software that cannot identify input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by using the color space of the input ICC profile SRGB found in the data When printing Adobe RGB data you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer fro
204. ical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Is the size of the loaded paper correct The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that you have specified Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded Print Results Not Satisfactory EE Note The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting This printer performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean A small amount of ink is ejected for cleaning Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber it may be ejected on the paper if you load paper larger than that you have specified Page top Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 407 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Colors Are Uneven or Streaked U320 Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Colors Are Uneven POOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOODOODOOOOOOOOOOOOHNK Colors Are Streaked e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head
205. ically reduce large document that the parter cannot output 3 Select the layout Page 275 of 468 pages Duplex Printing Page 276 of 468 pages Select Normal size or Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple Side When you want to change the setting select another value from the list Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper After one side is printed reload the paper correctly according to the message Then click OK to print the opposite side P important When a media type other than Plain Paper Hagaki A or Hagaki is selected from the Media Type list Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable When Borderless Poster or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed out and are unavailable After printing the front page there is an ink drying wait time before starting to print the back page Operation stops temporarily Do not touch the paper during the time You can change the ink drying wait time at Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab When you perform the automatic duplex printing for Hagaki pri
206. ign If necessary make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background EA Note You can customize the calendar display font colors of the dates and days of the week position and size of the calendar etc Setting Calendar Display You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change Background dialog box To display the Change Background dialog box click Background Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 118 of 468 pages E Note See Help for details on the Page Setup screen O Page top Selecting a Photo Page 119 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting a Photo A043 Selecting a Photo 1 Click Select Images The Select Images screen appears Seket rrapes for calendar You Can abo add replace rogas later i the edaing process To corect or enhance mages cick the ComecyEnhance button AOON Corrections and enhancements in the resuming screen ag W E AR a amp Sor by Date a BB eto Sy Loreres 1 Coroso D Meor IG0009_5429 GOOO S409 Ins e Pages t 2 Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures EA Note You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Cre
207. ile Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 116 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A041 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 117 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A042 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Calendar from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty pacer sze etc n General Settings then select a desga Cick the button at the bortom to custome calendar elements After spectying paper s22 atc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper Sze Ad Sat Holdays ponat Onentaton AJ Start from month s Re SHB0 m i Inside Papas C sengs Background 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Start from Period EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can add holidays to your calendar Setting Holidays 3 Select a layout for Des
208. ile wil be playheck BE Derktop D Uiteanies BC 4 7 Computer a Netwerk a Y Centre Panel Selected 0 ES Note You can also display the Video Frame Capture window by clicking J Capture frames from video in the Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click E Add Image See Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window for details on the Video Frame Capture window 2 In the Select Video dialog box select the folder containing the video from which you want to capture still images The videos in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails miniatures Creating Still Images from Videos Page 184 of 468 pages EA Note Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are displayed The selected video plays 3 Select the video from which you want to capture still images and click OK The selected video plays in Preview of the Video Frame Capture window Video Frame Capture Aamo Frame Captere Setings Y 0 0000 00 Captured frames Select Video Exit 4 CWsorsUseNamguWvi 0001 MOV Selected 0 EA Note oa Pause appears while a video plays and Playback appears while a video is stopped Use pon Pause and a Frame backward Frame advance to display the frame you want to capture 4 Display the frame you want to capture and click Capture The captured still image is di
209. ine Maintenance Page top Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Page 432 of 468 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM U150 Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Cannot access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM e Check 1 Is the power on If the power is off an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen turn on the printer then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 2 Is the printer connected to the computer If the printer is not connected to the computer an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen connect the printer to the computer securely then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 3 Are the ink tanks installed properly If genuine Canon ink tanks are not installed properly an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 4 Are any operations in progress on the printer If any operations are in progress on the printer an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen make sure that the operation is complete then access CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 5 Is the printer driver installed
210. ing from the printer driver P important Reduced printing may affect the layout depending on your document 1 Open the printer driver setup window Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 2g Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer driver setup window quit the running application software 2 Click Print Area Setup in the Page Setup sheet and select Use reduced printing Page top No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 396 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks U313 No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks No Printing Results Printing Is Blurred Colors Are Wrong White Streaks Page 397 of 468 pages Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory Check 2 Check the status of ink tanks Replace the ink tank if the ink has run out m Routine Maintenance Check 3 Is the orange tape or protective film remaining Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the L shape air hole is exposed as illustrated in A If the orange tape is left as in B pull the orange tape and remove it Check 4 Print the Nozzle Che
211. ing off the printer Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Paper Is Jammed inside the Printer at the Transport Unit Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing s In Other Cases Page top Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Page 419 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray U349 Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray Remove the paper following the procedure below 1 Slowly pull the paper out either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot whichever is easier EA Note f the paper tears and a piece remains inside the printer open the Top Cover and remove it Be careful not to touch the components inside the printer After removing all paper close the Top Cover turn the printer off and turn it back on m f you cannot pull the paper out turn the printer off and turn it back on The paper may be ejected automatically 2 Reload the paper and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer If you turned off the printer in step 1 all print jobs in the queue are canceled Reprint if necessary EA Note When reloading the paper confirm that you are using the paper suited for printing and are loading it correctly Loading Paper We recommend you use paper other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or grap
212. ings tab When you want to save the stamp with a different title type a new title in the Title box and click Save Click OK when the confirmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Stamp list Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp 1 Click Define Stamp in the Stamp Background Stamp dialog box The Stamp Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the stamp to be deleted Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab Then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background Stamp dialog box opens again O Page top Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Page 283 of 468 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing gt Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background P405 Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used You can select a bitmap file omp and register it as a new background You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background An unnecessary background can be deleted at any time The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows
213. ink lamps are flashing refer to Routine Maintenance and confirm the status of each ink tank Follow the directions given in your setup manual to install the Print Head If the Print Head is already installed remove the Print Head once and then reinstall it Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Six flashes The Inner Cover is opened Seven flashes Ink tank is not installed in the correct position Eight flashes Ink absorber is almost full Nine flashes The printer has not received a response from the digital camera The digital camera or digital video camcorder connected is not compatible with this printer Ten flashes Cannot perform duplex printing Eleven flashes Automatic Print Head Alignment failed Page 385 of 468 pages If the error is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center When you start printing on paper close the Inner Cover then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer e Some ink tanks are not installed in the correct position The lamps on the ink tanks flash e More than one ink tanks of the same color are installed The lamps on the ink tanks flash Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate positions gt Routine Maintenance The ink absorber is almost full Press the printer s RESUME CANCEL button to continue printing Contact the service center e Check the device connected to the printer Printing photos directly is possible on
214. int Head Alignment refer to Routine Maintenance EE Note Close the Inner Cover if it is open The print head alignment pattern is printed in black and blue only 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Load three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette 3 Open the Paper Output Tray and extend the Output Tray Extension 4 Print the pattern 1 Open the printer properties dialog box Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Click the Maintenance tab then Custom Settings Select the Align heads manually check box then click Send Confirm the displayed message and click OK In the Maintenance sheet click Print Head Alignment oar on Confirm the displayed message and click Align Print Head P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress EA Note To confirm the current setting click Print Alignment Value and print the pattern 7 After the pattern is printed click Yes The dialog for entering a print head alignment value is displayed 5 Look at the first printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks Manual Print Head Alignment ae gt a b 22 amp n me pb g tt 2 gt p E bel es E Note m If it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setti
215. int server properties and then click the Drivers tab If the Change Driver Settings button is displayed click that button When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete e If you are using Windows Vista press the Alt key On the File menu select Run as administrator and then click Server Properties When the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Click the Drivers tab In the Installed printer drivers list click the printer to delete 4 Delete the printer driver When you click Remove Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed Select Remove driver and driver package and then click OK In the confirmation dialog box click Yes When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box click Delete 5 Click OK The deletion of the printer driver is complete P important You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list If this happens restart your computer and then try again Page top Before Installing the Printer Driver Page 452 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Drivers gt Before Installing the Printer Driver P040 Before Installing the Printer Driver This section describes the items that you should check before installing the printer driver You should also refer to this section if the
216. inter is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Auto Power On Specifying Enable from the list will turn the printer on upon receipt of print data Auto Power Off Specify time from the list When this time lapses without any print data being received the printer is turned off automatically 4 Transmit the settings Click Send When the confirmation message appears click OK The Maintenance tab is displayed again The Auto Power On Off function is enabled hereafter When you want to disable this function select Managing the Printer Power Page 378 of 468 pages Disable from the list according to the same procedure Note When the printer is turned off the status monitor message varies depending on the Auto Power On setting When Auto Power On is enabled Printer is standing by is displayed When Auto Power On is disabled Printer is offline is displayed Page top Reducing the Printer Noise Page 379 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Reducing the Printer Noise P034 Reducing the Printer Noise This function allows you to reduce the operating noise Select when you wish to reduce the operating noi
217. inting of the print head alignment pattern This takes about 5 minutes E9 Note If the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed the Alarm lamp flashes Refer to Eleven flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above adjust the print head position manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 90 A Page top Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Page 61 of 468 pages Basic Guide z E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller C099 Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it paper may not be fed properly In this case clean the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller so perform this only when necessary You need to prepare three sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 4 Select Roller Cleaning 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Roller Cleaning r ma Cason P4800 wie Frntag Petewece Haun taat ap mel reine rals eta aaia p
218. inue printing in this condition you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level Press and hold the printer s RESUME CANCEL button for at least 5 seconds and then release it With this operation releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble which may be caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition Note If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled the ink tank is displayed in gray on the printer status monitor s Routine Maintenance If a PictBridge compliant device is connected via a USB hub remove the hub and connect it directly to the printer Page top POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately Page 388 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately U330 POWER Lamp Flashes Green and Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Alternately A printer problem has occurred Disconnect the printer cable from the printer turn the printer off and then unplug the printer from the power supply Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on If the problem is not resolved contact the service center Page top Cannot Install the Printer Driver Page 389 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Inst
219. ion Menu EX which is used to start the software applications supplied with the printer The information on Easy WebPrint EX a software application for printing web pages is also included m Solution Menu EX Solution Menu EX is a software application that provides quick access to other software applications supplied with the printer manuals and online product information E9 Note Install Solution Menu EX the on screen manual or other supplied software applications you want to use from the Setup CD ROM when they have not been installed or have been uninstalled To install them select them in Custom Install Menus are displayed in Category Menu Area of Solution Menu EX Main Screen Click a menu in Category Menu Area to display icons for functions available in that menu in Function Icon Area of Main Screen The number and types of icons or menus displayed in Main Screen may vary depending on your printer and region The screen below is for Windows 7 B C A Seunta es A Main Screen B Function Icon Area C Category Menu Area D Desktop Accessory E Shortcut menu to which you can add the icons of frequently used functions F Accessory Icon that lets you display Main Screen show or hide Shortcut menu etc Photo Print Print photos taken with a digital camera Canon Web Service Download content or materials from the website for printing CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM is a premium cont
220. ions until the printer completes the cleaning of the Print Head This takes about 1 minute E9 Note Clicking Initial Check Items displays the items to be checked before cleaning the Print Head Prive Head Chante Cm sinagad pord gt and tse Select Pa taget rk gao hr coama P you eure nae A ha bk pap 4 5 Confirm the message and click Print Check Pattern The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern 6 Examine the nozzle check pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern E9 Note f the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice clean the Print Head deeply See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply O A Page top Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Page 57 of 468 pages Basic Guide E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head Deeply C097 m Cleaning the Print Head Deeply If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head clean the Print Head deeply Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head so clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loa
221. irmation message appears 5 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again The registered title appears in the Background list Deleting an Unnecessary Background 1 Click Select Background in the Stamp Background dialog box The Background Settings dialog box opens 2 Select the background to be deleted Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab and then click Delete Click OK when the confirmation message appears 3 Complete the setup Click OK The Stamp Background dialog box opens again Q Page top Printing an Envelope Page 286 of 468 pages AdvancediGmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Printing an Envelope P406 Printing an Envelope If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information For details on how to load an envelope into the printer refer to Loading Paper in the manual Basic Guide The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows 1 Load an envelope into the printer Fold down the envelope flap Orient the envelope so that the address side is on top and the flap is on the left and then load the envelope vertically in the rear tray lt 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the media type
222. is used Click Save to register the specified settings For instructions on registering settings see Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile Page top Setting a Page Size and Orientation Page 253 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Setting a Page Size and Orientation P400 Setting a Page Size and Orientation The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab When you are not able to specify them with the application the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the paper size Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab in my Fe Quack Setup E Man SB Page Seto of Efecte A Martenance El Page Sue Letter 8 5731 Hi a Onentation AJ Porat A Langrcape Rotate 180 degrees B Same os Page Size a ga a a Pian Paper Leter 8 5711 215 82794m Nometsize FetoPope Page Layout g Ua IE J Atonscahy reduce large documart that the perter carr output Oupley Parting Automate Prit Aea Setup Staple Side
223. istering Documents to My Manual 1 From Select Target select My Manual The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list 2 Select the documents to be printed From the Documents to Be Printed list select and check the title check boxes of the documents to be printed ES Note Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 3 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 4 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 5 Execute print Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents with selected check boxes are printed Print All Documents You can print all documents of the on screen manual 1 From Select Target select All Documents The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list and the check boxes are automatically selected Note When you uncheck the check box of a document title that document is not printed Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles Click Print Preview to di
224. ith the cotton swab If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller contact the service center O O Page top Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Page 63 of 468 pages Basic Guide a E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette C100 Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette If the Pad in the Cassette is smeared with paper powder or dirt two or more sheets of paper may be ejected Follow the procedure below to clean the Pad in the Cassette You need to prepare cotton swab 1 Pull out the Cassette from the printer and remove all the papers 2 Clean the Pad A sideways with a moistened cotton swab gt Important After cleaning the smeared Pad dry it completely If the problem is not resolved contact the service center O A Page top Opening the Maintenance Screen Page 64 of 468 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Opening the Maintenance Screen C150 Opening the Maintenance Screen You can perform maintenance operations from the printer driver setup window m Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window EJ Note Make sure that the power is turned on and the printer is connected to a computer 1 Click the Start button and Devices and Printers When you are using Windows Vista Click Control Panel and Printer under Hardware and Sound When you are using Windows XP Click Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware then Printe
225. ition Size Frame Position and size of the date The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited For PREMIUM Contents Print View appears depending on the selected content You can set to select images from PREMIUM Contents Images or Local Images For PREMIUM Contents Print the folder tree area is not displayed when Local Images are not available for the selected content In the Replace Image dialog box you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails See Help for details Replacing Photos Page 230 of 468 pages Page top Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Page 231 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos A085 on A amp Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos You can adjust the position angle and size of images P important For PREMIUM Contents Print using premium content images this function may not be available depending on the selected image i Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click a Edit Image or double click the image E9 Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Postion 4 Size Crop Frame Date Comments
226. iver SA Printing with Other Applicat ts Various Printinge Method The Canon L printer diver is software thal is installed on your computer for printing data on this previer D Chere te Pret Qual The Canon I printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your SAU Overview of the Printer printer Can understand and sends the converted data to Me printer L Printer Dever Ocera Because diferem models support aferen print data formats you need a Canon U printer driver for the D Specific model you are using D XPS Printer Dever LJ How to Open the Pri 1 Maintenance Tab How to Use Printer Driver Help L Caren IJ Status Mee LJ Previ You can display the Help describing the ceiver setting items through the printing preferences screen of Om D Caren the Canon L printer driver 8 Changing the Prinder Settires To view all Gescriptions of a tab BBD Troubleshooting Cack the Help button on each tad A dalog Dox opens displaying a description of each fem on the 8 Feperdix tad D Using Easy PhotoPrint EX You can also click the link found in the Gescripton of an tem to display a description of the linked Balog don To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to leam about and then click What s This Alternatively when the BIAS Help button is found at the ght end of he Stie bar click that tuton and then click he fem you want to learn about AGescripton of the item is disp
227. ix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox To correct manually deselect the checkbox Face Brightener Corrects the entire image to brighten the facial area in and around the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider Face Sharpener Corrects the entire image to sharpen the facial area in and around the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles in the selected area You can adjust the effect level using the slider Blemish Remover Page 181 of 468 pages Correct Enhance Images Window Page 182 of 468 pages Removes moles in the selected area OK Applies the selected effect to the specified area Undo Cancels the latest correction enhancement Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced adjusted image the selected one Save All Corrected Images Saves all the corrected enhanced adjusted images displayed in the thumbnail list Exit Click to close the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Toolbar Toolbar a Sy Zoom In Zoom Out Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the image E Full Screen Displays the entire image in Preview Compare Displays the Compare Images window You
228. ize auuu 3 Bordetess FttoPoge Scaled Page Layout cu J 0O F Automatically reduce large document that the perter cama output Oupleg Parting Ausoenatic Pret Area Setup Staple Sde Long side stapling Lett Spectr Margi Copies 1 gt 159 ry i E Pert tore Lart Page Colste a Place stamp over texs Sap first page only Background Sarge 1 Background fra page only Cx Gee Gee Ge Note With the XPS printer driver the Stamp Background button has become the Stamp button and only the stamp function can be used Registering a Stamp Page 281 of 468 pages 3 Click Define Stamp The Stamp Settings dialog box opens Stamp Settings Not Saved 2 Save Placemert Save setings Rap Type Text zj Qarp Tee TrueType Fort Ara tye Regaar j S 3 Osina Cor AGB 192 152 192 Select Color 4 Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window e Stamp tab Select Text Bitmap or Date Time User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type e For Text registration the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text If necessary change the TrueType Font Style Size and Outline settings You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color e For Bitmap click Select File and select the bitmap file bmp to be used If necessary change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area e For Date Tim
229. ized Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 with the printing side whiter side facing UP in the Rear Tray For Automatic Print Head Alignment always load paper on the Rear Tray e The Paper Output Slot is exposed to strong light Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Twelve flashes Cannot print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Thirteen flashes The ink level cannot be detected Fourteen flashes Ink tank cannot be recognized Fifteen flashes Ink tank cannot be recognized Sixteen flashes The ink has run out Page 386 of 468 pages Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and then adjust your operating environment and or the position of the printer so that the Paper Output Slot is not exposed directly to strong light After carrying out the above measures if the problem continues after aligning the Print Head again press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and then perform Manual Print Head Alignment Manual Print Head Alignment You cannot print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM When you print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM confirm the message on the computer screen make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors then start printing again The remaining ink level cannot be correctly detected The lamp on the ink tank flashes Replace the ink tank and close the Top Cover s gt Routine Maintenance Printing with an ink tank that was once empty may da
230. jet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program dJ For development and marketing of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that n the information below recorded in your Canon product be colected on your computer and sent to Canon through the Intemet Information related to Canon inkjet printer scanner fax 0S version language and display setting information Device driver and application software usage logs Information related to Canon inkjet printer fax Printer s ID number Installation date and time Ink use information Number of sheets printed and Maintenance information In this survey we wil not collect or send any information about your computer other than that above or any of your personal information For this reason from the information that is sent to us we are unable to identify specific customers We ara tharofnra nnahla tn recnand tn rannacte tn dierince anu crilactad infnematinn If you agree that we collect and send the information above and that we cannot disclose any collected information cick Agree Otherwise cick Do not agree If you wish to uninstall this program cick Uninstall This wil uninstall the program and no further survey wil be made H Uninstal Do not agree Agree Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 427 of 468 pages e If you agree to participate in the survey program Click Agree then follow the on screen instructions The printer usage information wi
231. k Pattern O A Page top Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Pattern C095 m Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and clean the Print Head if necessary gt Examining the Nozzle Check 1 Check if there are missing lines in the pattern 1 or horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 ee ae n 4 x x e m i l eee n a hi If there are missing lines in the pattern 1 Clean the print head nozzles of the Black ink group PGBK A Good B Bad Lines are missing If there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 Clean the print head nozzles of the Color ink group C M Y BK A B A Good B Bad Horizontal white streaks are present If there are missing lines in the pattern 1 and also there are horizontal white streaks in the pattern 2 Clean the print head nozzles of the All Colors ink group 2 Take the appropriate action When cleaning is not required Click Exit on the Pattern Check dialog box to exit the nozzle check pattern examination When cleaning is required 1 Click Cleaning Page 53 of 468 pages Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 54 of 468 pages raem Sena w A s ne Neng amare aos ee naa care mr ay ane I Eea Pe yrr seat menas ame ret acces a 8 eee aes mman Be de a aw eke a
232. lPrint and refer to the application s manual as follows From the Start menu select All Programs gt CD LabelPrint gt Manual P important Disc Label is not displayed in Menu if CD LabelPrint is not installed on your computer Je Contabaproe New Ea Ele Ed jet Foge may Eosen Setiegs Yew Hep O AN SES oh SF r A Sede a ween ce ounce Si sj zj Si H Gi zi i Si 3 Page top Printing Calendars Page 114 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Calendars A040 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Calendars Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Changing Layout Changing Background s gt Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos s gt Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos s gt Setting Calendar Display Setting Holidays s gt Saving Printing Calendars Page 115 of 468 pages Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved F
233. layed When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on screen manual the documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side When you click found to the left of eS the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed Note Click i Cte to close or display the contents pane Page top Operating the Explanation Window Page 78 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Explanation Window Operating the Explanation Window Explanation Window Canon series On screen Manua Se fon x 4 Back p Ch U Contents xy My Manual J Search E Print Advanced Sores Advanced Gude How to Use Ths Manual How to Use This Manual o Operating the Explanation Window Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document gt Trademarks and Licenses a 1 Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document 2 The cursor jumps to the top of this document Window Used in Operation Explanation This on screen manual describes with a window displayed when the Windows 7 operating system Home Premium called Windows 7 below is used Page top Printing This Manual Page 79 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Printing This Man
234. le still images according to the settings Auto Frame Capture Settings A Start time 0 00 00 00 End time 0 00 15 00 Total captures 10 o 10 framefs v EA Note a Use vja Down arrow Up arrow to show hide the Auto Frame Capture Settings area Start time End time Displays the start end time of the time range from which to capture still images Total captures Displays the number of still images to be captured Capture Method Select from All frames frame s sec int and frame int Capture Captures still images according to the settings You can capture up to 150 frames at a time from one video Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Select Video Displays the Select Video dialog box Select a folder then select the video from which you want to capture still images Save Saves the still images selected in the Captured frame s area Exit Click to close the Video Frame Capture Movie Print window 2 Preview Area The video selected in the Select Video dialog box appears in Preview tt Frame backward Frame advance Click to reverse advance one frame and pause You can also click during playback to reverse advance one frame and pause Plays or pauses the video Pause appears while a video plays and Playback appears while a video is stopped a Stop Stops the video CD scope Captures the current frame and displays the still image in the Captured frame s area You can also cap
235. leaning the Exterior of the Printer Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the printer Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials as this may scratch the surface Page top Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Printer Page 358 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Printer U063 Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Printer If protrusions inside the printer are stained wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like P important Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the printer Page top Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page 359 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer Performing Maintenance from a Computer sb Cleaning the Print Heads Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers Aligning the Print Head Position s gt Manual Print Head Alignment sb Checking the Print Head Nozzles b Cleaning Inside the Printer Page top Cleaning the Print Heads Page 360 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Mai
236. les Questions and Answers Printing Layout Page 135 of 468 pages How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 136 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A151 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Easy PhotoPrint EX gt Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears Page top Selecting the Paper and Layout Page 137 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Layout gt Selecting the Paper and Layout A152 Selecting the Paper and Layout 1 Click Layout Print from Menu The Page Setup screen appears Soecty paper sze etc ni General Settings then select a Byout After spectying paper sze etc proceed to the Select Images screen General Settings Paper See 47x67 10xi5em pret date Orentaton A Portrar O Lancscape Layouts 2 Set the following items in the General Settings section Paper Size Orientation Print date EA Note See Help on the paper size that can be selected You can customize the date position size color etc in the Date Settings dialog box To display the Date Settings di
237. lity A4 in Printer Paper Size and Automatically Select in Paper Source are selected Note When you specify two or more copies in Copies the printed pages will be collated The settings can be changed However after changing Printer Paper Size confirm that the setting for Page Size on the Page Setup sheet matches the setting set in the software application For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide If you select A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source the printer feeds the paper from the Cassette If you select other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper the printer feeds the paper from the Rear Tray If you select the wrong page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality 3 Click OK Pras ntwera Dm M Oen ee G A Paping gk Bats j uee ES Note For details on the printer driver functions click Help or Instructions to view the online help or the on screen manual Advanced Guide The Instructions button appears on the Quick Setup Main and Maintenance sheets if the on screen manual is installed on your computer You can name the changed settings and add to Commonly Used Settings For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide If the Always Print with Current Settings check box is selected the current settings will be applied from the next
238. ll be sent via the Internet If you have followed the on screen instructions the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again Note When the information is being sent a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed In this case confirm that the program name is IJPLMUI exe then allow it If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box the information will not be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey To send the information automatically see Changing the confirmation screen setting e If you do not agree to participate in the survey program Click Do not agree The confirmation screen will be closed and the survey at that time is skipped The confirmation screen will be displayed again two months later e To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program To uninstall the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program click Uninstall then follow the on screen instructions e Changing the confirmation screen setting 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e In Windows 7 or Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Uninstall a program e In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs ES Note In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confir
239. lling the latest printer driver delete the previously installed version For instructions on deleting the printer driver see Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Related Topics Obtaining the Latest Printer Driver Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Before Installing the Printer Driver Page 453 of 468 pages Installing the Printer Driver Page 454 of 468 pages Page top Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Page 455 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals U509 Uninstalling the On Screen Manuals Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on screen manuals from your computer Before uninstalling the on screen manuals exit all on screen manuals that are opening 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Canon XXX Manual where XXX is your printer s name gt Uninstall 2 Click OK when the confirmation message appears E Note When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed click OK to restart your computer Page top Transporting the Printer Page 456 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Transporting the Printer U510 Transporting the Printer When relocating the printer pack the printer using the original packing materials If you do not have the original packing materials pack the printer carefully using protective material and place it inside a sturdy box P i
240. low Hi Speed USB Connection Does Not Work This device can perform faster Message Is Displayed If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi Speed USB the printer will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1 1 In this case the printer operates properly but printing speed may slow down due to communication speed e Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB port on your computer support Hi Speed USB connection e Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi Speed USB connection Be sure to use a certified Hi Speed USB cable We recommend that the cable is no longer than around 10 feet 3 meters e Does the operating system of your computer support Hi Speed USB connection Obtain and install the latest update for your computer e Does the Hi Speed USB driver operate properly Obtain the latest version of the Hi Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on your computer P important For details on Hi Speed USB of your system environment contact the manufacturer of your computer USB cable or USB hub Page top Print Results Not Satisfactory Page 393 of 468 pages Nelizlnesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory U310 Print Results Not Satisfactory If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks misaligned lines or uneven colors confirm the paper and
241. lready been printed on the Disc Tray the Disc Tray may be ejected In this case try printing again after clearing the Detects a printable disc in the disc tray check box in Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab in the printer driver and clicking Send When printing is over select the Detects a printable disc in the disc tray check box and click Send EA Note Ifthe Detects a printable disc in the disc tray check box is cleared printing may start without the printable disc loaded Selecting the check box prevents the Disc Tray from getting dirty Page top Cannot Print on the Disc Label Page 346 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Print on the Disc Label D010 Cannot Print on the Disc Label s gt Disc Label Printing Does Not Start Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly Disc Tray Jammed Disc Label Printing Does Not Start e Check 1 Is the Disc Tray placed properly Open the Inner Cover properly place the Disc Tray again then press the RESUME CANCEL button Use the Disc Tray supplied with this printer G is on the upper side For details on how to place the Disc Tray see Attaching Removing the Disc Tray e Check 2 Is the printable disc placed on the Disc Tray Place the printable disc on the Disc Tray properly then press the RESUME CANCEL button Make sure that you are using the Disc Tray supplied with the printer G is on the upper sid
242. ly JPEG Exif data format is available for saving downloaded images 7 Click Exit P important The search results images will be deleted if you exit before saving them Page top Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 193 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites gt Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window A171 Easy PhotoPrint EX Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window In this window you can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to print P important Internet connection is required to use this function Internet connection fees apply This function is supported under Windows XP or later This product uses the Flickr API but is not endorsed or certified by Flickr To display the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window click D Import photos from photo sharing sites in the Select Images screen or Add Image dialog box To display the Add Image dialog box select the page you want to add images to in the Edit screen then click E Add Image 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area 2 Toolbar 3 Thumbnail Window 4 Selections Area 1 2 3 4 1 Settings and Operation Buttons Area Photo Sharing Sites Displays the name of the photo sharing site Search
243. ly is captured the image may not be corrected properly Correct Captured Frames Noi Enhance E Apply to all frames Reset Selected Frames F 0 00 00 76 0 00 03 06 0 00 05 83 a 1 Task Area Noise Reduction Reduces noise tonal variation that may appear in images taken in dark locations such as night scenes using a digital camera Enhance resolutions Select this checkbox to reduce the jaggies roughness in images Apply to all frames Select this checkbox to correct all the images displayed in the thumbnail list OK Applies Noise Reduction to the selected images or all images Noise will be reduced to make the images more vivid ES Note Correction may take time depending on your environment When the Enhance resolutions checkbox is selected Noise Reduction and Enhance resolutions are applied simultaneously Reset Selected Frames Cancels all corrections applied to the selected images Exit Closes the Correct Captured Frames window and returns to the Video Frame Capture or Movie Print window Source images will be overwritten by the corrected ones Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window 2 Toolbar Q Q Reduce Enlarge frame Reduces or enlarges the displayed image Whole frame Displays the entire image in Preview LL Compare Displays the Compare Captured Frames window You can compare the images before and after the correction side by side The image before the correction is displa
244. ly with a PictBridge compliant device e Acommunication time out occurs if an operation takes too long or if it takes too much time to send data This may cancel printing In such cases disconnect and reconnect the USB cable When printing from a PictBridge compliant device depending on the model or brand of your device you may have to select a PictBridge compliant print mode on the device before connecting it to the printer You may also have to turn on your device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the printer Perform necessary operations before connecting your device referring to its instruction manual If the error is still not resolved check if you can print another photograph The size of paper may not be compatible with automatic duplex printing The sizes of media suitable for auto duplex printing are A4 Letter A5 and B5 Make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the printer is correct Pressing the RESUME CANCEL button will eject the paper and restart printing from the front side of the next paper The reverse side of the ejected sheet will not be printed e Print Head nozzles are clogged Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error and print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the Print Head Routine Maintenance e Paper of size other than A4 or Letter is loaded in the Rear Tray Press the RESUME CANCEL button to dismiss the error then load a sheet of A4 Letter s
245. m the Media Type list on the Main tab Printing with ICC Profiles Page 305 of 468 pages DR ask Setup S Mer 3 Page Setup of Efece a Martensnce Meds Tipe Pian Pacer Ed Paper Source Atomaca Select Pere Quality Wah Pian Paper Gutom Leter 85x11 215 2 273 4nm Color rtensty Ago O Grayscale Prrtng E Preview before panting 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select ICM or ICC Profile Matching for Color Correction 6 Select the input profile Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data e For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile Select Standard e For Adobe RGB data Printing with ICC Profiles Select Adobe RGB 1998 P important When the application software specifies an input profile the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer Adobe RGB 1998 will not be displayed You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer 7 Select the rendering intent Select the coloring adjustment method in Rendering Intent Saturation This method reproduces images eve
246. mage it To delete all images from the selected image area click W Delete All Imported Images EA Note You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos See Help for details on the Select Images screen O Page top Editing Page 109 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Editing A024 Easy PhotoPrint EX Editing 1 Click Edit The Edit screen appears mm Ne bum Canon Easy PhotePrint EX row AZ New Album Canon Easy PhotoPrint EX todoa Ede atom as needed Insert text add rrages or change Gyout Edit Tools Insde Pages Meu l 3 TEXT ACE oe S EE Edit General Toos Celi e lip 4 Print Settings EMEI Order Algn Dstrbute f lt fej A Inside Pages Back Cover RE mO w a 2 3 f 4 S 2 Edit your album if necessary Changing Layout Changing Background m Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos gt Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos s gt Cropping Photos Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos Attaching Comments to Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited album It is recommended that you save the item if you want t
247. mage the printer If you want to continue printing in this condition you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level Press and hold the printer s RESUME CANCEL button for at least 5 seconds and then release it With this operation releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any printer malfunction or damage caused by refilled ink tanks Note If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled the ink tank is displayed in gray on the printer status monitor Routine Maintenance e The ink tank is not compatible with this printer The lamp on the ink tank is off Install an appropriate ink tank gt Routine Maintenance e Appropriate ink tank is not installed Printing cannot be executed because the ink tank is not compatible with this printer Install the appropriate ink tank Routine Maintenance If you want to cancel printing press the printer s RESUME CANCEL button An ink tank error has occurred The lamp on the ink tank is off Replace the ink tank Routine Maintenance The ink has run out The lamp on the ink tank flashes Replace the ink tank and close the Top Cover gt Routine Maintenance Printing under the current condition may damage Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Nineteen flashes An unsupported USB hub is connected Page 387 of 468 pages the printer If you want to cont
248. mall size when printing on paper smaller than A5 Picture postcards Postcards affixed with photos or stickers Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive Any type of paper with holes Paper that is not rectangular Paper bound with staples or glue Paper with adhesives Paper decorated with glitter etc S A Page top Routine Maintenance Page 41 of 468 pages Eye Guide E Contents gt Routine Maintenance Routine Maintenance This section describes the procedure to replace ink tanks when they run out of ink to clean the printer when the print result is faint or to take an action when paper does not feed properly Replacing an Ink Tank Replacing Procedure Checking the Ink Status When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern Cleaning the Print Head Cleaning the Print Head Deeply Aligning the Print Head Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette Opening the Maintenance Screen Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window A Page top Replacing an Ink Tank Page 42 of 468 pages Basic Guide Ady E Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt Replacing an Ink Tank c091 Replacing an Ink Tank When remaining ink cautions or errors occur the Alarm lamp will flash orange to inform you of the erro
249. mation warning dialog box may appear when installing uninstalling or starting up software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task If you are logged on to an administrator account follow the on screen instructions 2 Select Canon Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program 3 Select Change If you select Yes after you have followed the on screen instructions the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey If you select No the information will be sent automatically ES Note If you select Uninstall or Remove the Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program is uninstalled Follow the on screen instructions Page top Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing Page 428 of 468 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing U332 Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing e Check Is the paper size or media type appropriate e Make sure that the actual size of the paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing The sizes of media suitable for automatic duplex printing are A4 Letter A5 and B5 Load paper of suitable size then press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer e Make sure that the Page Size or Paper Size setting matches the actual size of the paper with a size suitable for automatic duplex printing First check the Page Size setting in t
250. mplete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order Page top Poster Printing Page 269 of 468 pages Advanced Gttels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Poster Printing P401 Poster Printing The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data divide it into several pages and print these pages on separate sheets of paper When the pages are pasted together they form a large print like a poster JL The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows Setting Poster Printing 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set poster printing Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver DR ak Setup gt Man A Page Setup af Efecte Martenance El Foge Sze Letier 85x117 Onertation A Pora A ungego Rotate 180 degrees f BD Preter Peper Sze Leter 35x11 z Page Layout Poster a a asa g Feta Page PogeLayot EE eta Long ade saping Lef v Specty Margy eons 1 ns Yy i Part form Last Page Colste 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list
251. mportant The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again gt Saving Photos When you print on a bordered layout the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become wider than the other Printing Page 101 of 468 pages gt How Do Print with Even Margins ES Note You can crop images or print dates on photos Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can specify advanced Photo Print settings number of copies print quality etc in the Preferences dialog box El To display the Preferences dialog box click oat Settings or select Preferences from the File menu See Help for details on the Layout Print screen O Page top Creating an Album Page 102 of 468 pages AJAS SE Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album A020 Easy PhotoPrint EX Creating an Album Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos
252. mportant N w oi Do not transport or store the printer slanted vertically or upside down as the ink may leak and damage the printer Turn the printer off Confirm that the POWER lamp is off and unplug the printer P important Do not unplug the printer while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing green as it may cause malfunction or damage to the printer making the printer unable to print Retract the Paper Support and the Output Tray Extension then close the Paper Output Tray Disconnect the printer cable from the computer and from the printer then disconnect the power plug from the printer Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the printer to keep them from opening during transportation Then pack the printer in the plastic bag Attach the protective material to the printer when packing the printer in the box P important Pack the printer with the Print Head and ink tanks left installed in the printer EA Note When you ask a shipping agent to transport the printer clearly label the box as FRAGILE or HANDLE WITH CARE Page top Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Page 457 of 468 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window U511 Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start menu of the Windows Open the Printer Driver Setup
253. mputer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Questions and Answers gt What Is C1 or C4 A098 rl E What Is C1 or C4 When an album is printed labels such as C1 and C4 are printed as page numbers The C1 and C4 represent the front cover and back cover respectively C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover C3 Inside the back cover C4 Back cover EE Note C2 C3 appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank Leave the inside of back cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box Page top Photo Print Settings Page 202 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings A101 Photo Print Settings Printing Labels on Discs Directly Printing Vivid Photos s gt Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on Photos Photo Print s gt Printing Multiple Photos on One Page Printing an Index Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print s Printing Photo Information s gt Saving Photos sb Opening Saved Files Page top Printing Labels on Discs Directly Page 203 of 468 pages AdvancediGmde Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing Labels on Discs Directly A070 Easy PhotoPrint EX o Printing Labels on Discs
254. n more vividly than the Perceptual method Perceptual This method reproduces images by focusing on color tints that most people prefer Select this method to print photos Relative Colorimetric When image data is converted to the color space of the printer this method converts the image data so the color reproduction approximates the shared color regions Select this method to print image data with colors that are close to the original colors Absolute Colorimetric When Relative Colorimetric is selected white spots are reproduced as white spots of the paper background color However when Absolute Colorimetric is selected how the white spots are reproduced depends on the image data P important When Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP SP3 is used this function is disabled 8 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 9 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer uses the color space of the image data Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction s gt Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Page 306 of 468 pages A Adjusting Color Balance Page 307 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced
255. n of the page size or media type See Media Types You Can Use E9 Note When printing select the correct page size and media type If you select the wrong page size or media type the printer may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality For details on how to load paper in each paper source see Loading Paper in the Cassette or Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Loading Plain Paper in the Cassette When you use A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper load it in the Cassette The printer feeds paper from the Cassette automatically by selecting plain paper A4 B5 A5 or Letter size in the print settings with the printer driver when printing For details on how to change the paper source setting refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Loading Photo Paper Envelopes in the Rear Tray When you use photo paper load it in the Rear Tray The printer feeds paper from the Rear Tray automatically by selecting the media types other than plain paper such as photo paper in the print settings with the printer driver when printing When you use plain paper other than A4 B5 A5 or Letter size also load it in the Rear Tray Loading Paper Page 25 of 468 pages O A Page top Loading Paper in the Cassette Page 26 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Cassette C072 m Loading Paper in the Cassette You can l
256. ndow P important Some images such as images in formats other than JPEG do not appear Save Selected Image Saves the image selected in the Selections area Save Selected Images Saves all the images displayed in the Selections area Exit Click to close the Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites window 2 Toolbar mmi bdi Select all images Selects all the images in the page displayed in the Thumbnail window When you select an image a checkmark appears in its checkbox ES Note You can select up to 300 images Cancels all image selections in the page displayed in the Thumbnail window q b gt Back to the previous page Go to the next page Displays the previous next page 1 p S pages yen Page number entry box Total pages View Enter a page number and click View to display the page A Thumbnail Size Slider Resizes the images in the Thumbnail window Move the slider to the right to enlarge and left to reduce the images 3 Thumbnail Window Displays the thumbnails miniatures of the search results images The title is displayed under each Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 196 of 468 pages thumbnail To select an image click the thumbnail or checkbox P important Due to limitations of photo sharing sites if the search results exceed 4 000 images the same images as those displayed in the page containing the 4 001st image will be displayed in all the subsequent pages For
257. ng an Ink Tank If you run out of supplied paper Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 or the specified Canon genuine paper is not immediately available or obtainable you can use plain paper and align the Print Head manually Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide The print head alignment pattern is printed in black and blue Aligning the Print Head without a computer You can also align the Print Head from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized supplied paper or Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 in the Rear Tray Load it with the printing side whiter side facing you in the Rear Tray 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the POWER lamp flashes green four times then release it immediately The print head alignment sheet will be printed and the printer will adjust the print head position automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the print head alignment pattern 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Load a sheet of A4 or Letter sized supplied paper or Canon Matte Photo Paper MP 101 in the Rear Tray Load the paper with the print side whiter side facing you in the Rear Tray gt Important You cannot use the Cassette to align the Print Head a
258. ng that produces the least noticeable vertical white streaks MANI LLLI B A Less noticeable vertical white streaks B More noticeable vertical white streaks 2 Repeat the procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for column G then click OK For column F and G pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal streaks EA Note m f it is difficult to pick the best pattern pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal white streaks C Less noticeable horizontal white streaks D More noticeable horizontal white streaks 3 Confirm the displayed message and click OK The second pattern is printed P important Do not open the Top Cover while printing is in progress Page 365 of 468 pages Manual Print Head Alignment 6 Look at the second printout and adjust the print head position 1 Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern in column H that has the least noticeable vertical streaks 7 z 3 3 HINN s AMG s WN 4 HINN 4 I e Di BND s gt m 2 H 2 N 2 A DE 1 s n on o u 2 DE 1 Gk 1 2 G0 2 DE E s ENE s SNE gt Sm DINS D lt n GE gt SIN gt 2 coe ier ee pi p u k 2 lt 5 WI i lt gt M gt Wi 2 i So 1 om o m afi oo 2 NNN gt WN 4 W s NEIN EE ee et ae a 6 amp Engr be ue nna umu wua min mmn HEN um uum in
259. nhance then click OK that appears over the image Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 172 of 468 pages Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area a Click Compare to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save enhanced images as new files EA Note 1 To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images a Only JPEG Exif data format is available for enhanced images 7 Click Exit P important The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images Page top Using the Blemish Remover Function Page 173 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Blemish Remover Function A065 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Blemish Remover Function You can remove moles 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears EAE v RedEye Conector 22 Face Shspene SS Digtal F
260. nhance images in this window To display the Correct Enhance Images window click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print RedEye Conecton Face Shspener Diptal Face Smoothing C Uters UserName sanpled3 jpg Selected 3 1 Task Area 2 Toolbar 1 Task Area Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs Click the Auto or Manual tab to display the corresponding tab Auto Tab Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image Correct Enhance Images Window Page 178 of 468 pages ae Comect Eanance Images Ss Auto C Pricritice Exi Irto s RedEye Conector Face Shspener Weak fj Story oS Digtal Face Smocthing C Uters UserNamelsamplhed3jpg Selected 3 Auto Photo Fix Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos P important The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print Photo Print allows you to automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ait Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Prioritize Exif Info Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of shoo
261. nozzles Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing Print Head Cleaning and Print Head Deep Cleaning e If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly Check to see if a particular color s ink tank is not empty If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again e f the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning turn off the printer and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours e If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice Colors Are Uneven or Streaked Page 408 of 468 pages If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center e Check 3 Perform Print Head Alignment Routine Maintenance E Note If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Manual Print Head Alignment Page top Printing Does Not Start Page 409 of 468 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printing Does Not Start U321 Printing Does Not Start Check 1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in then turn the printer on While the POWER lamp is flashing
262. nt History Page 444 of 468 pages 1 2 5 Open the printer driver setup window Set the preview Check the Preview before printing check box on the Quick Setup tab or the Main tab Complete the setup Click OK The Canon lJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing Editing print documents and print pages e Combining print documents You can combine multiple print documents to form a single document To select multiple print documents hold down the Ctrl key and click the documents to be merged or hold down the Shift key and press the upper arrow or lower arrow key By combining print documents you can prevent blank pages from being inserted when you execute duplex printing or page layout printing From the Document Name list select the documents to be combined On the Edit menu select Combine Documents from Documents to combine the documents in the listed sequence When you combine documents the documents selected before the combining are deleted from the list and the combined document is added to the list e Changing the sequence of print documents or print pages e To change the sequence of the print documents go to the Document Name list and select the print document to be moved Next on the Edit menu select Move Document from Documents and select the appropriate item e To change the sequence of the print pages click View Thumbnails from the Option menu and select the print pa
263. nt an address first and then print your message Note When performing the automatic duplex printing do not use any plain paper smaller than A5 Also do not select any type of paper other than Plain Paper Hagaki A or Hagaki at Media Type If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing perform Bottom Plate Cleaning in the Maintenance tab Related Topic Cleaning Inside the Printer Page top Stamp Background Printing Page 277 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Stamp Background Printing P403 Stamp Background Printing Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers are used The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data It also allows you to print date time and user name The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data The procedure for performing stamp background printing is as follows Printing a Stamp CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre registered 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab TR Qk Setup lt gt Main IA Page Sero gf Efecte Aj Martenance El Page Sze Letier 85x117 H a Onentation la Porat A unce i FM Rotge 180 de
264. nt screen Select te layout you wat to prit Check the Preview and cick the Prnt bution os Prong starts Exif Print S amp Sneaeeia Sei srg Sordered 44 m o mes Borceres x2 g E9 Note See the following section for details on how to select photos s gt Selecting a Photo The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type Photos are arranged in the following order Example Borderless x4 3 2 4 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click ot Settings or select Preferences from the File menu Page top Printing an Index Page 211 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing an Index A077 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing an Index You can print an index of selected photos An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one page It is convenient for managing your photos To print an index select Index from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you want to pret Check the Preview and cick the Print bution gA Sorceress Sordered f D P important Index cannot be printed if you select any
265. ntenance Page 354 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer Performing Maintenance from a Computer Page top Cleaning Your Printer Page 355 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer Cleaning Your Printer Cleaning Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Printer Page top Cleaning Page 356 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning U059 Cleaning This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your printer P important Do not use tissue paper paper towels rough textured cloth or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the printer and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results Be sure to use a soft cloth Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the printer as this may cause a malfunction or damage the printer s surface Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer s gt Cleaning the Protrusions inside the Printer Page top Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer Page 357 of 468 pages AdvancediGmde Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Cleaning Your Printer gt Cleaning the Exterior of the Printer U060 C
266. ntenance from a Computer gt Cleaning the Print Heads P026 Cleaning the Print Heads The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print even though there is enough ink The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows 1 2 Cleaning Open the printer driver setup window Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning Execute cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute Print head cleaning starts Complete cleaning The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message Check the results To check whether the print quality has improved click Print Check Pattern To cancel the check process click Cancel If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem clean it once more Deep Cleaning Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem 1 2 Open the printer driver setup window Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before per
267. nter Page 68 of 468 pages After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink Clean the inside of your printer with Bottom Plate Cleaning Refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip Check how to load the paper correctly e Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation When loading paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette make sure the orientation of paper Rear Tray Cassette To load paper in the Rear Tray load To load paper in the Cassette load paper with the paper with the printing side facing you printing side facing down e Is the paper curled The curled paper causes paper jam Flatten the curled paper then reload it Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Tip After loading paper be sure to specify the paper settings After loading paper be sure to select the loaded paper in Media Type of the printer driver If the type of paper is not selected you may not be able to get the satisfactory print result See Media Types You Can Use There are various types of paper paper with special coating on the surface for printing photos with optimal quality and paper suitable for documents Media Type of the printer driver has different settings for each type of paper in advance such as using ink ejecting ink or distance from nozzles so that you can print on each paper with the optimal image qualit
268. ntly Used Printing Profile Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper s Managing the Printer Power Reducing the Printer Noise Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page top Changing the Print Options Page 372 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Print Options P413 Changing the Print Options You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software Check this check box if part of the image data is cut off the paper source during printing differs from the driver settings or printing fails The procedure for changing the print options is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Print Options on the Page Setup tab TR Qk Setup lt gt Man 3 Page Sero gf Efecte A Martenance El Pope Sze Letier 8 5731 gt amp Onereaton A Porras A Langrcepe F Rotae 180 degrees a g Same os Page Size Page Layat Nomsisize aa a E S 33 Bai cem Jef Ga pi 0O F Atomatcaly reduce large document that the perter carrat output amp The Print Options dialog box opens Oupieg Prreng Aagomatic Pret Area Setup Staple Side Long side staging Leh Spectr Margin Gopes Pa gt 099 SY Eretan Lon Poe Colste d Deters Gos Gea Geen Gen Frevert loss of part d
269. ntouts Open it when printing 9 Inner Cover Close it when printing on paper 10 ON button Press to turn the power on or off gt Important Disconnecting the power plug When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power be sure to confirm that the POWER lamp is not lit If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing the printer may become unable to print properly since the Print Head is not protected E9 Note Auto power on off feature You can set the printer to turn on or off automatically Auto Power On Automatically turns on the printer when data is sent from the computer Auto Power Off Automatically turns off the printer when no data is sent for a certain interval Specify this setting on the Maintenance sheet of the printer driver setup window For details on the settings refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide 11 POWER lamp Lights green after flashing when the power is turned on 12 RESUME CANCEL button Press to cancel a print job in progress You can press this button to release from printer error status and resume printing after the printer problem is resolved 13 Alarm lamp Lights or flashes orange when an error occurs such as paper out or ink out E9 Note Page 5 of 468 pages Main Components POWER and Alarm lamps You can check the status of the printer by the POWER and Alarm lamps POWER lamp is off
270. nu Inthe contents pane select the document title that you want to add to My Manual and then click Add to My Manual at the bottom right of the pane Registering Documents to My Manual Page 86 of 468 pages 4 Display My Manual When you double click or select and press Enter key a document title displayed in List of My Manual that document is displayed in the explanation window EA Note To delete a document from List of My Manual select that document title from the list and then click Delete or press Delete key Page top Symbols Used in This Document Page 87 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Symbols Used in This Document Symbols Used in This Document Warning Instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Caution Instructions that if ignored could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation gt Important Instructions including important information Be sure to read these indications EE Note Instructions include notes for operation and additional explanations Page top Trademarks and Licenses Page 88 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Trademarks and Licenses Trademarks and Licenses e
271. o edit it again The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows C1 Front cover C2 Inside the front cover Editing Page 110 of 468 pages 2 3 C3 Inside the back cover 4 C4 Back cover C2 C3 appears only when the Leave the inside of front cover blank Leave the inside of back cover blank checkbox is selected in the Cover Options dialog box s gt Saving ES Note See Help for details on the Edit screen O Page top Printing Page 111 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Creating an Album gt Printing A025 l Easy PhotoPrint EX S Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Check abum print sattrigs Cick the Print button to print wth the current setings Printing starts Prener canon xox j Copies 1 Paper Sga AS Paper Sowce Automaticaly Select Maca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy 1t Prox Qvaity Standard X Cuplex Printing Qualty Settings Autoren Borderless Prete 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing EA Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing
272. oad only A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette Load other sizes or types of paper in the Rear Tray See Media Types You Can Use E9 Note Advice for printing on plain paper We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos For details on the Canon genuine paper see Media Types You Can Use You can use general copy paper For the page size and paper weight you can use for this printer see Media Types You Can Use 1 Prepare paper Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it E9 Note Align the edges of paper neatly before loading Loading paper without aligning the edges may Cause paper jams If paper is curled hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat For details on how to flatten curled paper refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide 2 Prepare the Cassette 1 Pull out the Cassette from the printer 2 Remove the Cover on the Cassette 3 Pull the tab A towards you to unlock and extend the Cassette Loading Paper in the Cassette 3 Load paper 1 Slide the Paper Guide B to align with the mark of page size The Paper Guide B will stop when it aligns with the corresponding page size mark 2 Load the paper stack WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN and THE LEADING EDGE TO THE FAR SIDE and align it against the right side of the Cassette E8 Note
273. oading two or more sheets of paper flip through the paper before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper align the edges of the sheets before loading e When loading two or more sheets of paper make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit However proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature and humidity In such cases reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit e Always load the paper in portrait orientation either in the Rear Tray or the Cassette regardless of the printing orientation e When you load the paper on the Rear Tray load the paper with the print side facing UP and slide the Paper Guides to align with the both sides of the paper e When loading paper in the Cassette slide the Paper Guide on the front side to align with the corresponding mark of page size Load the paper with the print side facing DOWN align the right edge of the paper stack against the right side of the Cassette then slide the Paper Guide on the left side to align with the left edge of the paper stack Loading Paper e Check 2 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled Loading Paper e Check 3 Make sure of the following when you load envelopes When printing on envelopes refer to Loading Paper and prepare the env
274. of the following paper sizes Credit Card Printable Disc You can print up to 80 images on one page Note See the following section for details on how to select photos s gt Selecting a Photo Photos are arranged in the following order Example Index x20 1 2 3 4 5 6 71 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box You can select the printing order from By Date By Name and By Selection To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings or select Preferences from the File Printing an Index Page 212 of 468 pages menu Page top Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print Page 213 of 468 pages Advanced Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print A078 Eroon Printing ID Photos ID Photo Print You can print a variety of ID photos P important The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use For details contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo To print ID photos select 4 x6 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen and select a layout of the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you want to pret Check he Preven
275. of the printer driver E Page Sze Letier 85x117 Onertation la Porat A uneo M Rotate 180 degrees BD Prea Paver Sze Leter 35x11 Page Layout Page Layout a BE 8 B Momas Borderless Fttofage Sod E Agonac Prrt Area Setup Staple Sade Lengde staging Top Specty Margn 1995 1 E i il Pert iom Last Page 7 Colste Pact Options Samp Backgrund Detauts Cox Ga to te 3 Select the print paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete 4 Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order If necessary click Specify specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box and click OK Page 267 of 468 pages Page Layout Printing Page 268 of 468 pages Page Layout Printing ex Posen Poga Pert a t Page Order oe tone Page Borger on canoni ootata eo Pages To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper select the number of pages from the list You can also set 2 Page Print or 4 Page Print on the Quick Setup tab Page Order To change the page arrangement order select an icon from the list to change the page placement order Page Border To print a page border around each document page check this check box Co
276. ollows ___ Custom Settings 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Make sure that the printer is on and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab The Custom Settings dialog box opens EA Note If the printer is off or bi directional communication is disabled a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status If this happens click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer 3 If necessary complete the following settings Prevent paper abrasion The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high density printing to prevent paper abrasion Check this check box to use this function Align heads manually Usually the Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head alignment but you can change it to manual head alignment If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory see Manual Print Head Alignment and perform manual head alignment Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment Uncheck this check box to perform the automatic head alignment Ink Drying Wait Time You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page
277. om Photo Sharing Sites s gt Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos Replacing Photos Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos gt Cropping Photos m Adding Text to Photos Printing Premium Content s gt Saving gt Opening Saved Files Questions and Answers m How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Page top Page 146 of 468 pages Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 147 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Premium Content gt Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX A181 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 From the Start menu select All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt Solution Menu EX then click Solution Menu EX Solution Menu EX starts Use Scanner Canon Web Service Help amp Settings Start Application Online Shopping Information vic CAV AE NEN if BX x 2 Select Photo Print then click the PREMIUM Contents Print icon Easy PhotoPrint EX starts and the Page Setup screen of PREMIUM Contents Print appears Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 148 of 468 pages Soecty paper sze n General Settings Select the contents type and the desred yout To arnt you need to nstal genuine Canon nts foe al colors in the Seocormted oeniter General Settings Paper Sie A4 Contents Type Candas ba Design Settings Sesign a month Orientation Layouts Calendar Settings snt m as E9
278. omputer gt Cleaning Inside the Printer P030 Cleaning Inside the Printer Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side of the paper Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on the printed page The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window Bottom Plate Cleaning 2 Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens 3 Load paper in the printer As instructed in the dialog box fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally and then unfold the sheet Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down 4 Perform the bottom plate cleaning Make sure that the printer is on and click Execute Bottom plate cleaning starts Page top Changing the Printer Settings Page 370 of 468 pages Advanced Guide z Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Page top Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Page 371 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer Changing the Print Options Registering a Freque
279. on Click Search frames to access the Canon website from which you can download additional materials for free Internet connection is required to access the website Internet connection fees apply Exit Easy PhotoPrint EX before installing frames Search frames will be displayed only if Album has been selected See Help for details on frames Page top Printing Dates on Photos Page 237 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Printing Dates on Photos A088 Printing Dates on Photos You can print dates on images P important For PREMIUM Contents Print you cannot print dates G Select the image you want to print the date on in the Edit screen and click e Edit Image or double click the image Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Edit Imag Postion amp Sze Crop Frame Oxe Commeres A Show date Text Orientation A Landscape ed O Portret Fort Sae Coi El rpi to al meses Select the Show date checkbox Set the Text Orientation Position Font Size and Color then click OK P important You cannot print dates on framed images Printing Dates on Photos Page 23
280. one page Click Print Area Setup and select one of the following processing methods Duplex Printing When automatic duplex parting is performed the partabie area of the Panter becomes narrower than usual and the printer may not be able to pirt the entre documert Select Use reduced panting to part within the Portable wea Uze reduced panting 0K cance Dette iso Use normal size printing Print without reducing the page Use reduced printing Reduce the page slightly during printing 5 Specify the side to be stapled The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings and automatically selects the best Staple Side When you want to change the setting select another value from the list 6 Set the margin width If necessary click Specify Margin and set the margin width and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print duplex printing will be started Performing Duplex Printing Manually You can perform the duplex printing manually 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set duplex printing Check the Duplex Printing check box and uncheck the Automatic check box on the Page Setup tab El Page Sze Letier 8 5511 H a QOnertation A Porat A ungcpe Rotte 180 degrees a Same os Page Sre S a 3 a Pian Paper Lemar 8 S x11 215 279 dem Nomelsize Bordslees FitoPage Scaled Page Laut g w V Actoerat
281. onger Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on 2 Open the printer driver setup window Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 3 Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings 4 Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time and then click Send 5 Confirm the message and click OK e Check 10 Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper Depending on the media type the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from the Rear Tray In this case load one sheet at a time Page top Back of the Paper Is Smudged Page 405 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Back of the Paper Is Smudged U318 Back of the Paper Is Smudged e Check 1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings Print Results Not Satisfactory e Check 2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the printer Cleaning Inside the Printer EE Note When performing borderless printing duplex printing or too much printing the inside may become stained with ink Page top Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout Page 406 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Results Not Satisfactory gt Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout U319 Vert
282. or Output Error Communication Error Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing For Windows Users Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Cannot Use the Contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM If You Cannot Resolve the Problem FAQs Instructions for Use Printer Driver Using Easy PhotoPrint EX How to Use This Manual Page 76 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Explanation Window s Printing This Manual Using Keywords to Find a Document Registering Documents to My Manual Symbols Used in This Document Trademarks and Licenses Page top Operating the Contents Pane Page 77 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Operating the Contents Pane Operating the Contents Pane Canon ries On screen Manua ro dak p A LW Contents x My manual P Sarh G Prit Q Anc pat Pee 3 Advanced Guide S Coren 7 gees On screen Advanced Guide gt Pretng from s Computer gt Presno win Omer Applicaton Software gt Overview of ne Preter Driver HQ HW series Basic Guide gt Canon U Preter Driver SAD 9 series Advanced Gade E How to Use This Manual S Printing from a Computer D Freire with the Bundled Canon IJ Printer Dr
283. or lighter paper except for Canon genuine paper as it could jam in the printer Page 38 of 468 pages Media Types You Can Use Page 39 of 468 pages Notes on Storing Paper Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package just before printing To avoid curling when you do not print put unused paper back into the package and keep it ona level surface And also store it avoiding heat humidity and direct sunlight Notes on Paper for Full page Borderless Printing Duplex printing is not available for full page borderless printing You cannot use A5 B5 and Legal sized paper and envelopes for full page borderless printing You can use plain paper for full page borderless printing However this may result in lower print quality We recommend using plain paper for a trial print O 4 Page top Media Types You Cannot Use Page 40 of 468 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Media Types You Cannot Use C076 m Media Types You Cannot Use Do not use the following types of paper Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results but also the printer to jam or malfunction Folded curled or wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper that is too thin weighing less than 17 lb 64 g m Paper that is too thick weighing more than 28 lb 105 g m except for Canon genuine paper Paper thinner than a postcard including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a s
284. ot as Fast as Expected U324 Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected e Check 1 Is printing performed in Quiet Mode Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode on the computer For faster printing do not print in Quiet Mode Reducing the Printer Noise e Check 2 Is the print quality set too high Increase the printing speed setting in the printer driver Setting to prioritize speed makes printing faster 1 Open the printer driver setup window sb Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window a Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer driver setup window quit the running application software 2 On the Main sheet select Fast for the Print Quality setting Depending on the media type the Fast option may not be available EE Note Setting to prioritize speed may reduce printing quality Printing speed may not improve noticeably by following the instructions above depending on your system environment Page top Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing Page 414 of 468 pages Nelizlnesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing U325 Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing e e Check 1 Is the POWER lamp off Check if the POWER lamp is lit green The Print Head Holder will not move unless the power is on Ifthe POWER lamp is off close the To
285. ow the instructions on the computer screen make sure that the operation is complete then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 6 Is the printer driver installed If the printer driver is not installed you cannot print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM Install the printer driver then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again e Check 7 Is the printer selected on Solution Menu EX If the printer is not selected on Solution Menu EX the menu of CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM is not displayed on Solution Menu EX Select the printer for Select Model on Solution Menu EX s Settings in the Help amp Settings menu then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM e Check 8 Is bidirectional support of the printer driver enabled If bidirectional support of the printer driver is not enabled an error message is displayed on the computer screen Follow the instructions on the computer screen make sure that bidirectional support of the printer driver is enabled then print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM again Note To enable bidirectional support of the printer driver select the Enable bidirectional support check box under the Ports tab in Properties of the printer driver Page top If You Cannot Resolve the Problem Page 434 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt If You Cannot Resolve the Problem U151 If You Cannot Resolve the Problem If you cannot resolve the pro
286. p Cover and turn the printer on While the POWER lamp is flashing green the printer is initializing Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit green and then open the Top Cover again Check 2 Is the Alarm lamp flashing Close the Top Cover confirm the number of times the Alarm lamp is flashing take the appropriate action to resolve the error and then reopen it For details on how to resolve the error see Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange Check 3 Has the Top Cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer If the Top Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the Print Head Holder moves to the right to prevent the Print Head from drying out Close and reopen the Top Cover to return the Print Head Holder to the position for replacing Check 4 Has the printer been printing continuously for a long period Close the Top Cover wait a while then reopen it If the printer has been printing continuously for a long time the Print Head Holder may not move to the position for replacing since the Print Head may overheat EE Note Opening the Top Cover while printing moves the Print Head Holder to the right Close the Top Cover and reopen it after printing finishes Page top Paper Does Not Feed Properly Page 415 of 468 pages Neleilesel gida Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Does Not Feed Properly U326 Paper Does Not Feed Properly e Check 1 Make sure of the following when you load paper e When l
287. pen the Print dialog box 2 Select your model name and click Preferences or Properties The printer driver setup window appears E8 Note Depending on application software you use command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps For details refer to the user s manual of your application software Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning or to configure printing profile that are common for all application software 1 Select items from the Start menu as shown below e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers e If you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e If you are using Windows XP select the start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes 2 Right click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed menu The printer driver setup window appears P important Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties Windows 7 or Properties Windows Vista Windows XP displays such tabs regarding the Windows functions as the Ports or Advanced tab Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software For tabs regarding Windows functions refer to the user s manual for t
288. pes may vary depending on the printer See Help for details The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type ES Note You can print directly on a printable disc by selecting Printable Disc for Paper Size Printing Labels on Discs Directly You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise Printing Vivid Photos m Reducing Photo Noise See Help for details on the Select Paper screen O Page top Printing Page 100 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Photos gt Printing A014 Easy PhotoPrint EX g Printing 1 Click Layout Print The Layout Print screen appears Select the layout you want t pirit Check the Preven ad cick tre Print bution os Angsa Exif Print Wa ie E R AE af Sorcered i P important The thumbnails reduced images displayed in the screen may appear as follows A black line appears along an edge of the image An edge of the image appears cropped However such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed and print results will not be affected 2 Select a layout you want to use Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos Note The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer paper size and media type 3 Click Print P i
289. plication Software gt Other Settings A102 Other Settings b Changing Layout sb Changing Background s Adding Photos Swapping Positions of Photos s gt Replacing Photos sb Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos s gt Framing Photos Printing Dates on Photos s gt Attaching Comments to Photos Adding Text to Photos s gt Saving Setting Holidays s gt Setting Calendar Display s gt Opening Saved Files Page top Changing Layout Page 220 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Changing Layout A080 gl Easy PhotoPrint EX 7 Changing Layout You can change the layout of each page separately P important For PREMIUM Contents Print you cannot change the layouts Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen then click a Change Layout Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK Album Edit Took Beja aag Baoe aS P important If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout the following will happen If the number of layout Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames frames is increased in the new layout If the number of layout Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the frames is decreased pages wit
290. plication Software Page 90 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software Printing with the Bundled Application Software What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX s gt Printing Photos Creating an Album s Printing Labels on Discs Printing Calendars s gt Printing Stickers Printing Layout s Printing Premium Content s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Creating Still Images from Videos s gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites s gt Questions and Answers Photo Print Settings Other Settings Page top What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Page 91 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX A000 What Is Easy PhotoPrint EX Easy PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with digital cameras You can also print borderless photos easily Select the Mem you want to create fom the manu Select LOrecy to access saved tems lt a amp Photo Print Abum Disc Label Calendar a gs PS SoS gt Stickers Layout Print Library P important Easy PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers It does not support some Canon compact photo printers including SELPHY CP series f a printer that supports Easy PhotoPrint EX is not installed you
291. pplication Software gt Other Settings gt Setting Calendar Display A100 ES Easy PhotoPrint EX 7 Setting Calendar Display You can customize the calendar display fonts lines colors position size etc Click Settings in the Page Setup screen of Calendar or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click Setup Calendar to display the Calendar Settings dialog box P important The Position amp Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from the Edit screen Style for Days of Week Fone Weck Stats on EE Note See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box Page top Opening Saved Files Page 247 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Opening Saved Files A103 Easy PhotoPrint EX Opening Saved Files You can open files created with Easy PhotoPrint EX 1 Click Library from Menu Canon Eany PhetePrnt EX Coo fk file Edt View Help Select the Rem you want to create from the menu Select Lorry to access saved tems SS er Print Se S lt Photo D Stickers The Open dialog box appears You can check files created and saved with Easy PhotoPrint EX in icon view only for Windows 7 Windows Vista or thumbnail view P important When using 64 bit editions of Windows 7 Windows Vista or
292. prove print quality gt Important Do not rinse or wipe the Print Head and ink tanks This can cause trouble with the Print Head and ink tanks E9 Note Before performing maintenance Make sure that the orange protective tape does not remain on the ink tank Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide Open the Top Cover and make sure that all lamps on the ink tanks are lit red If not see Checking the Ink Status and take an appropriate action Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven Step 1 See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern After cleaning the Print Head print and examine the nozzle check pattern If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the pattern Step 2 See Cleaning the Print Head If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice l Step 3 See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply E9 Note When you have performed the procedure until step 3 and the problem has not been resolved turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours If the problem is still not resolved the Print Head may be damaged Contact the service center When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are Misaligned See Aligning the P
293. puter Screen sb Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed gt Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed Error Regarding Automatic Print Head Alignment Is Displayed Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed s gt Writing Error Output Error Communication Error Other Error Messages The Inkjet Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed Error Number B200 A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Then contact the service center Is Displayed Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord of the printer from the power supply Contact the service center Error Number A printer error has occurred Turn the printer off and then on again If this doesn t clear the error see the user s guide for more detail Is Displayed is displayed in the alphanumeric character and depends on the error occurred e 5100 or 5110 Is Displayed Confirm the movement of the Print Head Holder blocked Cancel printing from your computer and turn off the printer Then clear the jammed paper or protective material t
294. r Refer to Four flashes of Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange in Troubleshooting of the on screen manual Advanced Guide and take an appropriate action E9 Note For information on the compatible ink tanks refer to the printed manual Getting Started If print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels see When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect m Replacing Procedure When you need to replace ink tanks follow the procedure below gt Important Handling Ink If you remove an ink tank replace it immediately Do not leave the printer with ink tanks removed Use new ink tanks for replacement Installing used ink tanks may cause the nozzles to clog Furthermore with such ink tanks the printer will not be able to inform you when to replace the ink tanks properly Once an ink tank has been installed do not remove it from the printer and leave it out in the open This will cause the ink tank to dry out and the printer may not operate properly when it is reinstalled To maintain optimal printing quality use an ink tank within six months of first use E9 Note Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black and white document or when black and white printing is specified Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the Print Head which may be necessary to maintain the printer s performance When an ink tank is out of ink replace it immediatel
295. r Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method P011 Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning method The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the print quality Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab and click Set The Custom dialog box opens Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Met Custom ER Q aity AA am je Fast fne 3 Setting the print quality and halftone expression method Move the Quality slider to select the quality level Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK EA Note Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones When you select Auto the data is printed with the optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones Diffusion places the dots randomly to express the halftones 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the
296. r converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer Because different models support different print data formats you need a Canon WJ printer driver for the specific model you are using How to Use Printer Driver Help You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of the Canon lJ printer driver e To view all descriptions of a tab Click the Help button on each tab A dialog box opens displaying a description of each item on the tab You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked dialog box e To see a description for each item Right click the item you want to learn about and then click What s This Alternatively when the Help button is found at the right end of the title bar click that button and then click the item you want to learn about A description of the item is displayed Related Topic How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window Page top XPS Printer Driver Page 328 of 468 pages AJAS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Overview of the Printer Driver gt Canon lJ Printer Driver gt XPS Printer Driver P416 XPS Printer Driver The following two printer drivers can be installed on Windows Vista SP1 or later e J printer driver
297. r on the computer for example frame erase copy To find an explanation of the operation for a specific purpose Enter function item to be printed for example print calendar 3 Click Start Searching Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 84 of 468 pages The search is started and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the search results list When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords the search results are displayed as shown below Documents Containing Perfect Match Documents containing the entire search character string including spaces exactly as entered perfect match Documents Containing All Keywords Documents containing all keywords that were entered Documents Containing Any Keyword Documents containing at least one of the keywords that were entered 4 Display the document that you want to read From the search results list double click or select and press Enter key the title of the document you want to read When the documents of that title are displayed the keywords found on those documents are highlighted Note The search history remains when you modify the keyword entry and perform search multiple times To delete the search history click located at the right of Keyword and select Clear History which is displayed Page top Registering Documents to My Manual Page 85 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt How to Use This M
298. r properly gt Important Do not use the following envelopes They could jam in the printer or cause the printer to malfunction Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface Envelopes with a double flap or sticker flaps Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive 1 Prepare envelopes e Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them e If the envelopes are curled hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction s i f the corner of the envelope flap is folded flatten it e Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the crease x x X O ae es Cee eee The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope gt Important The envelopes may jam in the printer if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned Make sure that no curl or puff exceeds 0 1 inches 3 mm 2 Load envelopes 1 Open the Paper Support and pull it out See 1 of step 2 in Loading Photo Paper 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open See 2 of step 2 in Loading Photo Paper 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the envelopes in the center of Loading Envelopes the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once 4 Sli
299. r specifying color correction is as follows You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set DR ak Setup Man E Page Setup gf Efecte Aj Martenance Meda Tipe Pian Pacer Ed Paper Source Aatomapcally Select Pisn Paper Leter 8 511 215 2279 40 Preview before parting 0K a doo Het The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Select color correction Click Matching tab select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following and click OK Specifying Color Correction Page 299 of 468 pages Driver Matching By using Canon Digital Photo Color you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction ICM ICC Profile Matching Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing Specify the input profile to be used None The printer driver does not perform color correction Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an application software to print data 4 Complete the setup Click
300. reas intact When printing the data the printer applies fine adjustment results such as brightness adjustments made with an application software Printing with ICC Profiles Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used Related Topic Interpreting the ICC Profile O Page top Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 301 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction gt Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver P015 Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print SRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them use a printing ICC profile in the application software and select settings for color management The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows 1 Open the printer driver set
301. red to as Windows 7 1 Make sure that the printer is turned on See Front View 2 Load paper See Loading Paper Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette EE Note Load A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper such as photo paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 4 Create or open a document to print using an appropriate software application 5 Open the printer driver setup window 1 Select Print on the File menu or the command bar in your software application The Print dialog box will appear 2 Make sure that your printer s name is selected E9 Note If another printer s name is selected click and select your printer s name 3 Click Preferences or Properties A Mata of pon Pegee i trem nthe 6 sige neg arte or neg 1 LF omana Por oangie 52 ee 6 Specify the required print settings Printing Documents 1 Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings Note When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in Commonly Used Settings the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also appear 2 Make sure of the displayed settings Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type Standard in Print Qua
302. rences dialog box To display the Preferences dialog box click ott Settings in the Layout Print screen or select Preferences from the File menu Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved it cannot be corrected again with Auto Photo Fix Also Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application digital camera etc manufactured by other companies 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears v RedEye Conecton 22 Face Shspene 29 Dipa Face Smoothing j 150305 _s p9 INGO007 spg Ex CAUrerd UserName MGS seg Selected 3 E Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be corrected enhanced See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window 2 Select the image you want to correct from the thumbnail list in the Correct Enhance Images window Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Page 160 of 468 pages The image appears in Preview EA Note If only one image is selected the thumbnail list does not appear below Preview 3 Make sure that Auto is selected 4 Click Auto Photo Fix then click OK The entire photo is corrected automatically and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on
303. rint Head When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 50 of 468 pages O O A Page top Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Page 51 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern C094 m Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper E9 Note f the remaining ink level is low the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly Replace the ink tank whose ink is low See Replacing an Ink Tank Printing the nozzle check pattern without a computer You can also print the nozzle check pattern from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open If the Inner Cover is open close it 3 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the POWER lamp flashes green twice then release it immediately The nozzle check pattern will be printed Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the printing of the nozzle check pattern Examine the nozzle check pattern and take an appropriate action See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Ch
304. rinter automatically switches the paper source Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose Page 289 of 468 pages When printing a large volume of data load plain paper of the same size in both the rear tray and the cassette The printer then automatically switches the paper source when paper runs out in one paper source thus reducing the work of reloading paper P important Continuous Autofeed is unavailable when paper other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type Since the printer feeds paper from the paper source that was being used the last time Continuous Autofeed was selected and printing ended load the same paper in both the rear tray and the cassette Paper Allocation When the media type for the print data is plain paper and the paper size matches the paper allocation setting the printer automatically feeds paper from the cassette If not the printer feeds paper from the rear tray To change the paper allocation settings click Paper Allocation specify the Paper Size to be loaded in the cassette and then click OK When you load frequently used plain paper in the cassette the printer feeds other types of paper from the rear tray thus reducing the work of reloading paper 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the printer uses the specified paper source to print the data Page top Displaying the Print Results before Printing Page 290 of 468 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide
305. rinting e By selecting Borderless Printing option you can make prints with no margins e When performing Borderless Printing slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is enlarged to fill the whole page e Duplex printing is not available when performing Borderless Printing e For Borderless Printing use the following paper Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT 101 Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 e Matte Photo Paper MP 101 This paper can be used only when printing from your computer Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality and or result in printouts with altered color hues Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality Use them only for test printing You can perform Borderless Printing on plain paper only when printing from your computer e Borderless Printing is not available for legal A5 or B5 sized paper or envelopes e Depending on the type of paper Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged When performing Automatic Duplex Printing the printable area will be 0 08 inches 2 mm smaller at the top margin Letter Legal Envelopes Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page top Other Sizes than Letter Legal Envelopes Page
306. rinting appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing Select this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box To display the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Printing 3 Click Print ES Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Page top Page 124 of 468 pages Printing Stickers Page 125 of 468 pages AJAS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers A050 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Stickers You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This s gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos s gt Creating Still Images from Vi
307. rinting from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Smoothing Jagged Outlines P407 Smoothing Jagged Outlines This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used The Image Optimizer function reduces the jagged outlines that are produced when photos and graphics are enlarged with your application It allows you to print smooth outlines This feature is especially useful when printing low resolution images from Web pages _ 4 The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set image optimizer Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab A casei Seman lt gt Man B Page Setup of Btects Mortensnce Pian Paper Leter 8 5711 215 9 279 4em 3 Complete the setup Click OK The photos and graphics will be adjusted and printed with smooth outlines EE Note Depending on application software or resolution of image data the image optimizer may have no discernible effects Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 320 of 468 pages It may take longer to complete printing when the image optimizer is used Page top Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration Page 321 of 468 pages AdvancediGmide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Dat
308. rom your computer 0 12 in 3 0 mm J y 1 47 in 37 4 mm F 0 13 in 3 4 mm 0 13 in 3 4 mm E Recommended printing area Page top Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History Page 443 of 468 pages Advancediemde Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History P048 Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History This function is unavailable when the standard lJ printer driver is used In the Canon IJ XPS preview window you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history to print the document The procedure for using the Canon IJ XPS Preview is as follows Page information Printer Paper Sze Letter 85 11 Media Type Prain Paper Paper Source Autonaticaty Seet Page Layout Normnabsize Print EJ Combine Documents G Delete Document Reset Documents ER View Thumbnails 5p b I Move Document l4 4 Dp DI Move Page Delete Page g ES Note Click View Thumbnails to view all print pages of the print document selected from the Document Name list To hide the print pages click View Thumbnails again Editing and Printing a Print Job When printing multiple documents or pages you can combine documents change the print sequence of the documents or pages or delete documents or pages Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Pri
309. rs and Faxes 2 Right click the Canon XXX icon where XXX is your printer s name and select Printing Preferences The printer driver setup window will appear ES Note You can also open the printer driver setup window from your software application or My Printer on the desktop For details refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide e ap Canan PBID wiec Printing Preteseces a M Oen one Spim IA Page See gf Bats j Martone temmen ty nl eo e a MAn nes Li peaa a ai Prange beton orang ihan ian IID dor nrg Traces roy Osim Fra ty Font mend Ponti Prt con Lom Pega Min Tape vety Papen See Pan for a Ch cn e w urere fort Quaty Mee Sosce emini Aer ate ay nm he aer Monn Piet th rre Sommer tee al os toe ne A Page top Appendix Page 65 of 468 pages Basic Guide E E Contents gt Appendix Appendix Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Tips on How to Use Your Printer A Page top Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Basic Guide Contents gt Appendix gt Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images It may be unlawful to print the following documents The list provided is non exhaustive When in doubt check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction Paper money Money orders Certificates of deposit Postage stamps canceled or unc
310. ry print jobs delete them Deleting the Undesired Print Job Check 7 Make sure that the Inner Cover is closed If the Inner Cover is opened close the Inner Cover and press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer Check 8 Make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box The printer will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer Printing Does Not Start Page 410 of 468 pages Make sure that your printer s name is selected in the Print dialog box E Note To make the printer the one selected by default select Set as Default Printer e Check 9 Configure the printer port appropriately Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately 1 Log on as a user account with administrator privilege 2 Select Devices and Printers from the Start menu In Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers In Windows XP select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Printers and Other Hardware gt Printers and Faxes 3 Right click the Canon XXX icon where XXX is your printer s name then select Printer properties In Windows Vista or Windows XP right click the Canon XXX icon where XXX is your printer s name then select Properties 4 Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings Make sure that a port named USBnnn where n is a number with Canon XXX appearing in the Printer column is selected for
311. s 1 Prepare paper See step 1 in Loading Paper in the Cassette Align the edges of paper If paper is curled flatten it 2 Load paper 1 Open the Paper Support and pull it out 2 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open 3 Slide the Paper Guides A to open them and load the paper in the center of the Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU 4 Slide the Paper Guides A to align them with both sides of the paper stack Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard The paper may not be fed properly Loading Paper in the Rear Tray gt Important Always load paper in the portrait orientation B Loading paper in the landscape orientation C can cause paper jams B c E9 Note Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark D E9 Note After loading paper Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper Size and Media Type in the printer driver See Printing Documents O Page 31 of 468 pages Loading Paper in the Rear Tray Page 32 of 468 pages A Page top Loading Envelopes Page 33 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Rear Tray gt Loading Envelopes C074 Loading Envelopes You can print on European DL and US 10 envelopes The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope s direction by specifying with the printer drive
312. s Additionally if the printer has been printing graphics or photos with intense colors continuously over a period of time the printer may stop printing to protect the Print Head In this case printing will not resume automatically Turn the printer off for at least 15 minutes A Caution The Print Head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the printer Never touch the Print Head or nearby components e Check 3 Is the paper loaded Make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray or Cassette If the printer has run out of paper load paper e Check 4 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations As printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the printer and the computer to process the printer may appear to have stopped operating In addition when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper the printer may pause temporarily In either case wait until the process is complete E Note f you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document printing may pause to allow the ink to dry Page top Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected Page 412 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected U323 Printer Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected e Check 1 Are the Print Head nozzles clogged Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine w
313. s may infringe personality rights Attribution Non Commercial CC license You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives CC license You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes You may not modify the work Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike CC license You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor Attribution CC You must show the title and licensor of the original license work along with your creation CC license Non Commercial Attribution No Derivatives CC license Attribution Share Alike CC license Attribution Non Commercial CC license Attribution Non Commercial No Derivatives CC license Attribution Non You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not modify the work You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions
314. s Custom Size You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size Such a paper size is called custom size The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab 1 Set the custom size in the application software On your application s paper size feature specify the custom size P important When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the height and width values use the application software to set the values When the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly use the printer driver to set the values 2 Open the printer driver setup window 3 Select the paper size Select Custom for Page Size on the Page Setup tab DR ak Setup lt gt Man 2 Page Setup of Efecte Al Martenance E fa a a Page Layout Pin Paper Gunton 8 50 11 00 g 1 IE J Atonaicaly reduce large documert that the perter cannct output Oupley Parting Automate Prit Aea Setup Sagie Sde Lergede saping det _ Specty mangn Sepes 1 93 1 re S j E Part tom Last Page Colste ox ae too Het The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens Setting Paper Dimensions Custom Size Page 292 of 468 pages Custom Paper Size X Unts zm SER Paper Se Width 850 E inches
315. s Vista Press the Alt key from the Printers window on the client system Open Run as administrator gt Server Properties from the displayed File menu Uncheck Show informational notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e If you are using Windows XP Open Server Properties from the File menu of the Printer and Faxes window on the print server system Uncheck Notify when remote documents are printed on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e The bi directional communication function is disabled and the correct printer status may not be recognized If a client user opens the printer driver properties to display the properties when using Windows 7 press the Alt key and select Printer properties from the displayed File menu and then clicks OK with the Enable bidirectional support check box cleared on the Ports tab the bidirectional communication function of the printer server may also be disabled In this case check Enable bidirectional support check box on both the print server system and the client system e When you print from a client system you cannot use Canon lJ Preview e When the functions on the Maintenance tab cannot be set properly from a client system they may be grayed out In this case change the settings from the print server When you change the settings of the print server you should delete the icon of the shared printer from the client system and then
316. s before Printing Page top About Disc Label Printing Page 333 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing About Disc Label Printing s gt Printing a Disc Label Troubleshooting Page top Printing a Disc Label Page 334 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label Printing a Disc Label Items to Prepare gt Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label sb Attaching Removing the Disc Tray s Printing on the Disc Label Printing with CD LabelPrint from the Computer Printing Area Page top Items to Prepare Page 335 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label gt Items to Prepare D018 Items to Prepare The following items are needed to print onto the printable disc e Disc Tray G is on the upper side e 3 15 inches 8 cm Disc Adapter Needed only when printing on 3 15 inches 8 cm printable discs Attached to the Disc Tray when shipped Printable Discs Obtain a 4 72 inches 12 cm or 3 15 inches 8 cm printable disc with a label surface compatible with inkjet printing A printable disc differs from regular BD DVD CDs in that its label surface has been specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer Page top Cautions When Printing on the Disc Label Page 336 of 468 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt
317. s for Cyan Magenta and Yellow Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left For example when cyan becomes weaker the color red becomes stronger You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver After adjusting each color click OK gt ABCDEF af 1234567 errs Nomai z Sample Type oO ie Standard lt Mengt 0 m4 hA sna echt Cortot 0 0 a Low High P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the document is printed with the adjusted color balance P important When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked Cyan Magenta and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable Related Topics Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity Adjusting Contrast Page top Adjusting Brightness Page 309 of 468 pages AdvancediGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Adjusting Brightness P018 Adjusting Brightness You can change the brightness
318. s the PictBridge function of the printer For the print settings on a PictBridge compliant device refer to the instructions given in the device s instruction manual EA Note Inthe following description names of setting items are given according to those used in Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices Setting item names may be different depending on the brand or model of your device Some setting items explained below may not be available on some devices When you cannot change print settings on a device the printer prints images as follows Paper size 4 x 6 101 6 x 152 4 mm Paper type Photo Layout 1 up Borderless Date File No Print Not printed Image Optimize The Photo optimizer pro function will be used for optimized printing The following settings can be used when printing from a PictBridge compliant device Paper size 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm 5 x 7 1 8 x 10 20 x 25 cm A4 8 5 x 11 Letter 4 x 7 1 10 1 x 18 cm 2 1 Can be selected only on certain Canon brand PictBridge compliant devices May not be selected depending on the device 2 Hi Vision may appear on a non Canon brand PictBridge compliant device Paper type e Default Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP 201 e Photo Photo Paper Plus Glossy Il PP 201 Glossy Photo Paper Everyday Use GP 501 Photo Paper Glossy GP 502 Photo Paper Plus Semi gloss SG 201 Photo Stickers When printing on sticker paper select 4 x 6 10 x 15 cm in Paper size Do not s
319. s when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Yes or Continue Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When you are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning Install the printer driver At the Welcome window click Next When the License Agreement window is displayed check the contents and click Yes If you do not agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement you cannot install this software Installation of the printer driver begins After the Installation Complete window is displayed check that the printer and the computer are connected through a cable To select the connection port for your printer manually check the Select printer port check box and click Manual Selection At the Select Port window select the connection destination and then click OK Complete the installation Click Complete Turn on the printer and wait awhile until the connection is recognized The procedure for installing the printer driver is complete Depending on the environment you are using a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed To complete the installation properly restart the computer P important You can download the printer driver for free but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility Before insta
320. se of the printer at night etc Using this function may lower the print speed The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows ssssastss s Quiet Mode 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab The Quiet Mode dialog box opens 3 Set the quiet mode If necessary specify one of the following items Do not use quiet mode The operating noise is at normal volume Always use quiet mode Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise Use quiet mode within specified time The operating noise can be reduced during a specified period of time Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated P important The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different 4 Transmit the settings Make sure that the printer is on and click Send Click OK when the confirmation message appears The settings are enabled hereafter E9 Note Depending on the paper source and the print quality settings effects of the quiet mode may be less Page top Changing the Printer Operation Mode Page 380 of 468 pages Nelizinesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Changing the Printer Settings gt Changing Printer Settings from Your Computer gt Changing the Printer Operation Mode P035 Changing the Printer Operation Mode If necessary switch between various modes of printer operation The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as f
321. setting up a computer directly connected to a printer with a USB cable is as follows e Settings on Client PC The procedure for setting up those computers that will use this printer through the network is as follows When you execute print the data is sent to the printer through the print server system P important Incase an error occurred when a document is printed by the client system to a shared printer the error message of Canon lJ Status Monitor will be displayed both on the client system and the print server system For regular printing Canon IJ Status Monitor will be displayed only on the client system E8 Note Install the printer driver from the Setup CD ROM that accompanies the printer on the print server system and each of the client systems according to the OS of each system Related Topic Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page top Settings on Print Server Page 460 of 468 pages Nelizinesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Settings on Print Server P043 Settings on Print Server When you use the printer on a network set up the printer driver for sharing on the server system The procedure for setting up the print server systems is as follows LP Install the printer driver on the print server system For details on installation instructions refer to the Install the Software in the manual Getting Started Select items from the Start menu as shown
322. sition angle and size of the text You can also set the color and line of the text box See Help for details To change the entered text select the text box and click Pal Edit Text Box The Edit Text Box dialog box appears You can change the text Adding Text to Photos Page 242 of 468 pages Page top Saving Page 243 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Other Settings gt Saving A091 Saving You can save edited items Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create Check abum print sattngs Cick the Print button to print wth the ourrent settings Printing starts Prener canon xox Copies Paper Sga Ag Paper Sources Meca Type Photo Paper Plus Glossy IL i Print Quality Duplex Printing 7 Autora T Borderiess Preteg When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save E9 Note Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen Page top Setting Holidays Page 244 of
323. sition immediately after removing the jammed paper Align the paper then reload it in the Cassette Reload paper in the Rear Tray if necessary E8 Note When reloading the paper into the printer confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it into the printer correctly Loading Paper Q Insert the Cassette into the printer again 7 Plug the printer back in and turn the printer back on All print jobs in queue are canceled Reprint if necessary If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the printer or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper contact the service center Page top In Other Cases Page 423 of 468 pages Advanced Gitels Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Paper Jams gt In Other Cases U353 In Other Cases Make sure of the following e Check 1 Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot e Check 2 Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray be sure to turn off the printer unplug it from the power supply then remove the foreign object e Check 3 Is the Rear Cover closed completely e Check 4 Is the paper curled m Check 3 Load the paper after correcting its curl Page top Message Appears on the Computer Screen Page 424 of 468 pages Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Message Appears on the Computer Screen U331 Message Appears on the Com
324. so install Easy WebPrint EX from the Setup CD ROM To install Easy WebPrint EX select Easy WebPrint EX in Custom Install To install Easy WebPrint EX on your computer Internet Explorer 7 or later is required and the computer must be connected to the Internet Page 20 of 468 pages A Page top Other Usages Page 21 of 468 pages Basic Guide zl E Contents gt Other Usages Other Usages This section introduces the function to print photos from your PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera connecting with a USB cable Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device A Page top Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 22 of 468 pages bse Guide A E Contents gt Other Usages gt Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device C063 Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device You can connect the PictBridge compliant device to this printer with a USB cable that is recommended by the device s manufacturer and print saved images directly For details on how to print saved images connecting the PictBridge compliant device refer to the on screen manual Advanced Guide For details on the print settings on the PictBridge compliant device refer to the instruction manual supplied with the device od Connectable devices Any PictBridge compliant device can be connected to this printer regardless of the manufacturer or model as long as it is compliant with the PictBridge
325. splay and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 3 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 4 Execute print Printing This Manual Page 82 of 468 pages Confirm the number of pages to be printed and then click Yes All documents are printed P important A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents Before printing be sure to check the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the zoom rate However if the print data extends outside the paper because of the new zoom rate that portion of the document will not be printed on the paper Page top Using Keywords to Find a Document Page 83 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt How to Use This Manual gt Using Keywords to Find a Document Using Keywords to Find a Document You can enter a keyword to search for a target document All documents in the currently displayed on screen manual are searched r D Canon HEE series On screen Manual 4 Back p GB Ly Contents sk My Manual 32 Search p _ Canon i peace Thee beans red eye operation my Start Soorching series Docunenks N Al a
326. splayed in the Captured frame s area P important You can capture up to 150 frames from one video 5 Select the image s you want to save and click Save When the Save dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save E8 Note Only JPEG Exif data format is available for saving created still images 6 Click Exit P important The captured still images will be deleted if you exit before saving them ES Note You can automatically capture multiple still images from a video Creating Still Images from Videos Page 185 of 468 pages Display the Auto Frame Capture Settings area then use fa Set start time Set end time in the Preview area to specify the time range In the Auto Frame Capture Settings area select a capture method and click Capture You can correct the captured still images in the Correct Captured Frames window To display the Correct Captured Frames window select the image s you want to correct in the Captured frame s area then click Correct image When the Movie Print window is displayed via Solution Menu EX you can print the captured still images To print specify the printer and media in the Print area then click Print When you print from the Movie Print window images are automatically cropped Therefore images will be printed with the left and right sides cut off If you want to adjust the cropping area before printing save the captured still image and print it
327. st does not appear below Preview Using the Face Brightener Function 3 Click Manual then click Correct Enhance 4 Click Face Brightener wx Cosrect Enhance Ly RedEye Correction 22 1 23 Week j Strong Specily the ares you want to conect 29 Face Sharpener oS Digital Face Smoothing 29 Bleweth Remover E Note Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener Move the cursor over the image The shape of the cursor changes to Cross 5 Drag to select the area you want to correct then click OK that appears over the image i The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter and the F Correction Enhancement mark appears on the upper left of the image EA Note You can also drag to rotate the selected area Click Compare to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that you can compare and check the result Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit Page 165 of 468 pages Using the Face Brightener Function Page 166 of 468 pages P important The
328. sult Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation 6 Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images You can save corrected images as new files EA Note To save only the image you like click Save Selected Image To save all images click Save All Corrected Images Only JPEG Exif data format is available for corrected images 7 Click Exit P important The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images Page top Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Page 170 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos gt Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function A064 Easy PhotoPrint EX Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually 1 Select photos in the Select Images screen then click P Correct Enhance Images The Correct Enhance Images window appears 22 Correct Enhance Images RedEye Connector Te 29 Face Shypena 29 Diptal Face Snoothng tw CA Users UserName friends jpg Selected 3 Ee Note You can also display the Correct Enhance Images window by clicking P Correct Enhance Images in the Layout Print or Edit screen In that case only the image displayed in Preview can be
329. t Head Nozzles Page 368 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a Computer gt Checking the Print Head Nozzles P029 Checking the Print Head Nozzles The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern Print the pattern if printing becomes faint or if a specific color fails to print The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows Nozzle Check Open the printer driver setup window Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab The Nozzle Check dialog box opens Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before printing the nozzle check pattern Load paper in the printer Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette Print a nozzle check pattern Make sure that the printer is on and click Print Check Pattern Printing of the nozzle check pattern begins Click OK when the confirmation message appears The Pattern Check dialog box opens Check the print result Check the print result When the print result is normal click Exit If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections click Cleaning to clean the print head Related Topic sb Cleaning the Print Heads Page top amp Cleaning Inside the Printer Page 369 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Maintenance gt Performing Maintenance from a C
330. t the paper size for the data Using Page Size select the page size that is set with your application 4 Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods e Select a Printer Paper Size When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size the page image will be reduced When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size the page image will be enlarged Scaled Printing DR casck Setup lt gt Main 3 Page Seti of Efecte Aj Martenance El Foge Sze Letter 85x11 Fi amp Onertation A Porat A Lindreape wm s Page Layaut Scaled a 4 a a Pian Paper AS 148 0x210 Orm Nomaleize Bordoiess Feto Page Scaled Page Layout te m e Ouphey Parting Aahomatic Prt Area Setup Long cide stapling Left v Specty Marr Sons gt 1 995 J gr Port tom Laat Page Coste Pact Options Stamp Backoround Oefauts CK aa or Heo e Specify a scaling factor Directly type in a value into the Scaling box asas 9 hen A Ponse of Etocs A Mortenance El Page Sze P a Onertation A Porat A Langreape i M Rotae 190 degrees BD Portar Poper Sae Leter 85x11 Page Lyo Scaled a gas g Pian Paper Letar 8 5 11 215 1275 dem Nomalsize Bodals FetoPoge Page Layout w J 0O sag DE onon Oupiey Parting Atomatic Prirt Area Setup Long ade saping Left Specty Mange Eons 099 CJ Gin Part iom
331. t to Page Printing Page 263 of 468 pages The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver PR aksn Man 58 Page Sete of Efecte ff Mortenance as ED Pope Sue Letter 8 511 z a Onentation la Porat A Langrcape Page Lay Ftto Page pes aE aAA Ein ae g a J Atomatic Prrt Area Setup Se Se ay 1 gt 1 99 KZ rrretson Poe Ti Colne CEET Cook Eaa or te 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size Page top Scaled Printing Page 264 of 468 pages AdvancedGuide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Various Printing Methods gt Scaled Printing P005 Scaled Printing F estival Festival E D The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set scaled printing Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab ASS aesa E El Page Sze Lotier 85x117 z 4 Onertation A Porat A ungego F Retste 180 degrees B Portar Poper Sze Later 85x11 Long cide taping Leh Specty Ma gt 1 995 Sons Ly i P Port iom Last Page 7 Colste Pat Options Samp Background Oetauts Goa Goa Goan Goma 3 Selec
332. ta and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application used Place stamp over text cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used When the XPS printer driver is used the stamp is normally printed in the foreground of the document Print semitransparent stamp Check this check box to print a semi transparent stamp on the document This function is available only when the XPS printer driver is used Stamp first page only To print the stamp only on the first page check this check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the data is printed with the specified stamp Printing a Background Two bitmap files are pre registered as samples 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Click Stamp Background on the Page Setup tab The Stamp Background dialog box opens 3 Select the background Check the Background check box and select the background to be used from the list The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab 4 Set the background details If necessary complete the following settings and then click OK Select Background button To use another background or change the layout or density of a background click this see Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background Background first page only To print the background only on the first page check this check box Stamp Background Printing Pa
333. ter or warming up wait until the job ends When it is ready the printer starts printing automatically Load paper and select Continue in the display on your PictBridge compliant device To resume printing you can also press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer instead of selecting Continue on the device If the Paper Output Tray is closed open it The printer resumes printing If the Inner Cover is opened close it and select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant device to stop printing Select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant device to stop printing Remove the jammed paper load new paper press the RESUME CANCEL button on the printer then try printing again Close the Top Cover on the printer The Print Head is defective or is not installed See Five flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action The ink absorber is nearly full See Eight flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate actior The ink tank is not installed properly or empty Check the number of how many the Alarm lamp flashes and take the appropriate action to resolve the error Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange An ink tank that was once empty is installed See Thirteen flashes in Alarm Lamp Flashes Orange and take the appropriate action Ink tank errors have occurred Replace the ink tank Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device Page 431 of 468 pages Rout
334. th the printer status monitor aD f Canon P4000 adas LEDOEL peer phost Lato C T A symbol appears in the area A if there is any information about the remaining ink level Example The ink is running low Prepare a new ink tank ES Note An error message may appear while printing Confirm the message and take an appropriate action Follow the procedure below to open the confirmation screen 1 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window 2 Click View Printer Status on the Maintenance sheet To confirm the ink tank information click the Ink Details menu Note While printing you can also display the printer status monitor by clicking the printer icon on the taskbar In Windows Vista or XP click Canon XXX where XXX is your printer s name on the taskbar O Page top When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect Page 49 of 468 pages GEHIE Gels Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect C093 When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly the print head nozzles are probably clogged Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern check the print head nozzle condition then clean the Print Head If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory aligning the Print Head may im
335. the Print Quality Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print each page of the item on a full page without borders You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Printing 3 Click Print ES Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Page top Page 156 of 468 pages Correcting and Enhancing Photos Page 157 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Correcting and Enhancing Photos A060 Easy PhotoPrint EX Correcting and Enhancing Photos You can correct and enhance images Click P Correct Enhance Images in the Select Images or Edit screen or in the Layout Print screen of Photo Print You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct Enhance Images window P important For Photo Print if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box you cannot correct enhance images EE Note See Correct Enhance Images Window for details on the Correct Enhance Images window Auto Photo Fix This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Red Eye Correction Function
336. the contrast On the other hand to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct reduce the contrast No adjustment Adjust the contrast The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Color Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Select the manual color adjustment On the Main tab select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set DR ask Snp Man 13 Page Setup gf Btects ff Martenance Meda Tipe Pan Papec z Paper Source Atomatcaly Selnct l The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 3 Adjust the contrast Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast and moving it to the left decreases the contrast You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider Enter a value in the range from 50 to 50 The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver Adjusting Contrast After adjusting each color click OK ABCDEF ab 1234567 vee Nomai Sample Type Sandard z View Color Porton P important Adjust the slider gradually 4 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the image is printed with the adjusted contrast
337. the left side of the screen Images cannot be corrected enhanced Image display order cannot be changed Edited images cannot be saved Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box Therefore you cannot use the Vivid Photo and Photo Noise Reduction functions Solution Menu EX Ver 1 0 0 or later supports the following functions Photo Print Album Disc Label Calendar Layout Print PREMIUM Contents Print P important When Easy PhotoPrint EX is started by selecting a function from Solution Menu EX Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen PREMIUM Contents Print is not displayed in Menu of Easy PhotoPrint EX To print premium content start Easy PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu EX Keep these points in mind when using PREMIUM Contents Print To print with Easy PhotoPrint EX you need to download and install the exclusive content See Downloading Premium Content for details on how to download content You may only use the content downloaded or printed for personal purposes You may not use the content for commercial purposes Supported Image Video Data Formats Extensions BMP bmp JPEG jpg jpeg TIFF tif tiff PICT pict pct Easy PhotoPrint image files epp MOV mov P important Only MOV format videos recorded with Canon digital cameras are supported When selecting
338. the margin width Click Specify and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box and then click OK Booklet Printing Page 273 of 468 pages Booklet Printing E27 ma Margin for tiging Lek m en hzer blank page Magn 04 gt nhs 0012 Page Bordar Canen _Ovtaute Cso Margin for stapling Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed Insert blank page To leave one side of a sheet blank check the check box and select the page to be left blank Margin Enter the margin width The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page Page Border To print a page border around each document page check the check box 5 Complete the setup Click OK on the Page Setup tab When you execute print the document is automatically printed first on one side of a sheet of paper and then on the opposite side When the printing is complete fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet P important Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper Hagaki A or Hagaki is selected for Media Type on the Main tab When Booklet is selected Duplex Printing Staple Side Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable Note The stamp and background are not printed on the inserted blank sheets with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing Page top Duplex Printing P
339. the previously installed version For information on how to delete the printer driver see Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Related Topics Before Installing the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Driver Page top Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Page 450 of 468 pages ndvanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Updating the Printer Drivers gt Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver P039 Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver The printer driver which you no longer use can be deleted When deleting the printer driver first exit all programs that are running The procedure to delete the unnecessary printer driver is as follows When There is an Uninstaller 1 Start the uninstaller e f you are using Windows 7 Windows Vista select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller e f you are using Windows XP select the start menu gt All Programs gt Your model name gt Printer Driver Uninstaller The Printer Driver Uninstaller dialog box is displayed P important In Windows 7 or Windows Vista a confirmation warning dialog box may appear when starting installing or uninstalling software This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task When you are logged on to an administrator account click Yes or Continue Allow to continue Some applications require an administrator account to continue When yo
340. the setup Click OK When you execute print the document is converted to grayscale data It allows you to print the color document in monochrome P important When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data In this case actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data convert the data to sRGB data using an application software Printing a Color Document in Monochrome Page 297 of 468 pages ES Note During Grayscale Printing color inks may be used as well as black ink Page top Specifying Color Correction Page 298 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Specifying Color Correction P013 Specifying Color Correction You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed Normally the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer This method is suitable for printing SRGB data When you want to print by using the color space Adobe RGB or sRGB of the image data effectively select ICM or ICC Profile Matching When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile select None The procedure fo
341. ther than English Selecting a Photo some English descriptions may Editing be displayed Printing Printing Labels on Discs Printing Calendars Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Stickers Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Layout Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Printing Premium Content Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX Selecting the Paper and Layout iP4800 series Advanced Guide Page 72 of 468 pages Selecting a Photo Editing Printing Correcting and Enhancing Photos Using the Auto Photo Fix Function Using the Red Eye Correction Function Using the Face Brightener Function Using the Face Sharpener Function Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function Using the Blemish Remover Function Adjusting Images Correct Enhance Images Window Creating Still Images from Videos Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Questions and Answers How Can Move or Copy the Saved File Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from How Do Print with Even Margins What Is C1 or C4 Photo Print Settings Printing Labels on Discs Directly Printing Vivid Photos Reducing Photo Noise Cropping Photos Photo Print Printing Dates on P
342. ting Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results It is recommended that you normally select this setting EE Note Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images JPEG 1 For Photo Print you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox Red Eye Correction Corrects red eyes Note For Photo Print you can also automatically correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the Enable Red Eye Correction checkbox Face Sharpener Sharpens out of focus faces You can adjust the effect level using the slider Digital Face Smoothing Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles You can adjust the effect level using the slider Apply to all images Correct Enhance Images Window Page 179 of 468 pages Automatically corrects enhances all images displayed in the thumbnail list OK Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images Reset Selected Image Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image Save Selected Image Saves the corrected enhanced image the selected one Save All Corrected Images Saves all the
343. tion Program Easy WebPrint EX Does Not Start up or Easy WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear If Easy WebPrint EX does not start up or its menu does not appear on Internet Explorer confirm the following EA Note You can use Easy WebPrint EX with Internet Explorer 7 or later e Check 1 Is Canon Easy WebPrint EX is displayed on the Toolbars menu in the Internet Explorer s View menu If Canon Easy WebPrint EX is not displayed Easy WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer Perform Custom Install on the Setup CD ROM then select Easy WebPrint EX to install it onto your computer EA Note f Easy WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer a message asking you to install it may be displayed on the notification area on the taskbar Click the message then follow the instructions on the computer screen to install Easy WebPrint EX While the installation or download Easy WebPrint EX is in progress it is necessary to access the Internet A connection charge is taken upon yourself e Check 2 Is Canon Easy WebPrint EX selected on the Toolbars menu in the Internet Explorer s View menu If Canon Easy WebPrint EX is not selected Easy WebPrint is disabled Select Canon Easy WebpPrint EX to enable it Page top Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Page 392 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Troubleshooting gt Cannot Connect to Computer Properly U309 Cannot Connect to Computer Properly Printing Speed Is S
344. tions of Photos Replacing Photos b Changing Position Angle and Size of Photos Cropping Photos s gt Printing Dates on Photos m Adding Text to Photos P important The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited stickers It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again s gt Saving Note See Help for details on the Edit screen 90 Page top Printing Page 132 of 468 pages Advanced Gtitels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Stickers gt Printing A055 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing 1 Click Print Settings The Print Settings screen appears Check sucker arnt settings Click the Pring button to print with the current settings Printing starts Preven Canon 00c Copies Paper Sge Proto Stickers Paper Sow ce Meca Type Glossy Photo Paper z Print Qualty Duplex Prntng Qualty Settings Bordertess Preice C Pret Postion Advanced EOE Te amp AN 2 2 Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used Printer Media Type Copies Paper Source Print Quality Borderless Printing Note The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type You can set a custom print quality level in th
345. to add photos to in the Edit screen then click a Add Image EE Note The screen s for Album printing is are used as example s in the following descriptions The screen s may vary depending on what you create D INGODD0_sjo INGOOD1_sicg ING0109_sjo9 Edit Tools hs 2 Ri 4 d abge TETE c c ss c ta aola Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add Image dialog box and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right EE Note Click an image to select it background turns blue or deselect it background turns white You can also select multiple images m You can also use still images captured from videos s gt Creating Still Images from Videos You can also use images downloaded from photo sharing sites on the Internet Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites For PREMIUM Contents Print View appears depending on the selected content You can set to select images from PREMIUM Contents Images or Local Images For PREMIUM Contents Print the folder tree area is not displayed when Local Images are not available for the selected content Select an option for Add to and click OK P important You can add up to 20 images at one time You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time Add it one at a time Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined When the number of pages incre
346. to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes You must show the title and licensor of the original work along with your creation You may not use the work for commercial purposes You may not modify the work You must show the title and licensor of the original Import Photos from Photo Sharing Sites Window Page 195 of 468 pages Commercial work along with your creation Share Alike CC You may not use the work for commercial purposes license Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor CC license Attribution CC You must show the title and licensor of the original Others license work along with your creation Attribution No You must show the title and licensor of the original Derivatives CC work along with your creation license You may not modify the work Attribution Share You must show the title and licensor of the original Alike CC license work along with your creation Even if your creation is built upon the work of others you must apply the same conditions to it as those set out for the original work by the licensor Start Search Starts searching for images and displays the images that match the search text in the Thumbnail wi
347. ture during playback 4 aa Mute Clear mute Switches audio OFF ON Playback Slider Displays the video playback progress Current playback time is displayed to the left of the slider Caja Set start time Set end time Set the start end time of the time range from which to capture still images automatically ES Note These buttons are displayed only when the Auto Frame Capture Settings area is displayed TTT Time Range Slider Displays the time range set with Cafn Set start time Set end time You can also set the start end time by moving BIIN Start End point located below the slider EA Note This slider is displayed only when the Auto Frame Capture Settings area is displayed 3 Captured Frame s Area Displays the thumbnails of the captured still images Double click a thumbnail image to display the Zoom In window in which you can check the details of the image iv Select all frames Selects all the images displayed in the Captured frame s area Page 188 of 468 pages Video Frame Capture Movie Print Window Page 189 of 468 pages When you select an image a checkmark appears in its checkbox Ld Clear all check marks Cancels all image selections in the Captured frame s area Correct image Displays the Correct Captured Frames window in which you can correct all the images selected in the Captured frame s area E Note When a frame in which the subject or camera has moved significant
348. u are logged on to a standard account switch to an administrator account and restart the operation from the beginning 2 Execute the uninstaller Click Execute When the confirmation message appears click Yes When all the files have been deleted click Complete The deletion of the printer driver is complete When There is No Uninstaller When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows 7 or Windows Vista follow these steps 1 Select the printer to be deleted e f you are using Windows 7 select the Start menu gt Devices and Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Remove device e f you are using Windows Vista select the Start menu gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click the model to delete then press the Alt key on your keyboard On the File menu click Delete 2 Delete the printer e f you are using Windows 7 when the confirmation message appears click Yes Then when the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes The icon is deleted e f you are using Windows Vista when the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Then when the confirmation message appears click Yes The icon is deleted Deleting the Unnecessary Printer Driver Page 451 of 468 pages 3 Select the printer driver to be deleted e f you are using Windows 7 click any icon in Printers and Faxes On the commandbar click Pr
349. ual Printing This Manual D Canon HEE series On screen Manual d Back p Ch Wy Contents xy My Manual P sorl amp Pret O Print Ea gt Howto Use This Manual IA Canon Aiie nn nting This E TE Document Selection E Pet Ser Select Target Current Document i Start penting Print Preyew Documents to Be Printed Current Document J Ganon senes On screen Manu Basic Guide Advanced Guide Troubleshooting g E print inked documents Click P to display the print pane to the left of the on screen manual E Note Click to close or display the print pane When you click and then click Page Setup the Page Setup dialog box appears You can then easily set up the paper to be used for printing Click and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box When the dialog box is displayed select the printer to be used for printing The Print Setup tab also allows you to select the printer to be used After selecting the printer to be used click Properties to specify the print settings Click and then click Option Settings to display the Option Settings dialog box You can then set up the printing operation Print document title and page number When this check box is checked the manual name and the page number are printed in the header top of the document Print background color and images When this check box is checked the backgro
350. und color and the image are printed Some images are printed regardless of whether this check box is checked or not Check number of pages to be printed before printing When this check box is checked the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed before printing starts This dialog box allows you to check how many pages will be printed On the Document Selection tab select the method for printing the document The following four methods of printing are available e Print Current Document e Print Selected Documents e Print My Manual Printing This Manual e Print All Documents Note You can select the type to be printed and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab Print Current Document You can print the currently displayed document 1 From Select Target select Current Document The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list Note By selecting Print linked documents you can also print documents that are linked to the current document The linked documents are added to the Documents to Be Printed list Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually print the document 2 Click Print Setup tab On the Page Setup tab select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings as necessary 3 Click Start Printing A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed 4 Execut
351. up window 2 Select the media type Select the type of paper loaded in the printer from the Media Type list on the Main tab Th carck Setup O Mar B Page Setup oA Becta ff Martonance Meda Type Pian Paper E Paper Source Actomamcaly Select Pere Quaity Wah aj amari Fag Pian Paper Gatom Leter 85x11 215 2279 40 Color rtensty Ago Grayscale Prrtng Preview before panting 3 Select the print quality For Print Quality select High Standard or Fast according to your purpose 4 Select the manual color adjustment Select Manual for Color Intensity and click Set The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens 5 Select color correction Click Matching tab and select Driver Matching for Color Correction Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver Page 302 of 468 pages 6 Set the other items If necessary click Color Adjustment tab and adjust the color balance Cyan Magenta Yellow and adjust Brightness Intensity and Contrast settings and then click OK 7 Complete the setup Click OK on the Main tab When you execute print the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data Related Topics s gt Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method Specifying Color Correction Adjusting Color Balance Adjusting Brightness Adjusting Intensity m Adjusting Contrast O Page top Printing with ICC Profiles Page 303
352. uplex Printing manually Specify Margin Print from Last Page Collate and Stamp Background Stamp on the Page Setup tab e Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result e With some applications the printing is divided into multiple print jobs To cancel printing delete all divided print jobs e f image data is not printed correctly display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software This may solve the problem E8 Note Disable ICM required from the application software cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used Points to Note with Applications e There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word Microsoft Corporation e When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver use Word to specify them e When selecting Fit to Page Scaled or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab the selected printing function may not be effective depending on the version of Word If this happens follow the procedure below 1 Open Word s Print dialog box Instructions for Use Printer Driver Page 437 of 468 pages 2 Open the printer driver setup window specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab and click OK 3 Without starting printing close the Print dialog box
353. ur important photos Media Types Commercially available papers e Plain Paper including recycled paper Media type settings Printer driver Plain Paper Paper load limit Rear Tray Approx 150 sheets 1 Cassette Approx 150 sheets for A4 B5 A5 and Letter 8 5 x 11 Paper Output Tray load limit Approx 50 sheets 1 A4 B5 A5 or Letter sized plain paper can be loaded only when Rear tray is selected in Paper Source setting for Plain Paper E gt Note Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions either very high or low temperature or humidity In such cases reduce the number of paper you load at a time to less than half 100 recycled paper can be used e Envelopes Media type settings Printer driver Envelope Paper load limit Rear Tray 10 envelopes Paper Output Tray load limit We recommend that you remove the previously printed envelope from the Paper Output Tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration E Note Feeding envelopes from the Cassette can damage the printer Always load in the Rear Tray Canon genuine papers Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side and notes on handling paper For information on the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper visit our website E Note The Model Number
354. ure 3 Check the ink lamps Close the Top Cover after checking the ink lamp status Ink lamp is on The ink tank is correctly installed Ink lamp is flashing Flashing slowly at around 3 second intervals dib SBD Ras Ink tank is running low Prepare a new ink tank Flashing fast at around 1 second intervals OOOO ras The ink tank is installed in the wrong position Or The ink has run out Make sure that the ink tank is installed in the correct position as indicated by the label on the Print Head Holder If the position is correct but the lamp flashes there has been an error and the printer cannot print Check the Alarm lamp on the printer Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide e Ink lamp is off The ink tank is not installed properly or the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled If the ink tank is not installed properly press the mark un Push on the ink tank until the ink tank clicks into place If it does not click into place make sure that the orange protective cap has been removed from the bottom of the ink tank If the ink lamp is still off after reinstalling the ink tank there has been an error and the printer cannot print Check the Alarm lamp on the printer Checking the Ink Status Page 48 of 468 pages Refer to Troubleshooting in the on screen manual Advanced Guide With the Computer Screen You can confirm the ink status wi
355. ured Info from the layouts in the Layout Print screen Select the layout you wart to prev heck the Preview and cick the Print bution Protng stars Faya Sela da ia Hal iy lal tha E Note See the following section for details on how to select photos s gt Selecting a Photo This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8 5 x11 and A4 Page top Saving Photos Page 216 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt Saving Photos A092 Saving Photos You can save edited photos The information of cropping and layout can be saved Click Save in the Layout Print screen rooe Select the layout you wartt to pirt Check tne Preven ad chick the Prnt batian Pike Prntng stares Exif Print H amp B Sl When the Save As dialog box appears specify the save location and file name then click Save P important If you edit a saved file and save it again the file will be overwritten To save a file again with a new name or to a different location select Save As from the File menu and save Note Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen Page top Opening Saved Files Page 217 of 468 pages AJAS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Photo Print Settings gt
356. ured on the print server system to be shared and then click Next ES Note If the icon for the printer is not displayed check that the printer is actually connected to the print server Complete the setup Take the appropriate action as described on the screen and then click Finish The icon for the shared printer will be created in the Printers and Faxes window The setup on the client systems is complete You can now share the printer in the network O Page top Restrictions on Printer Sharing Page 463 of 468 pages Nelizinesel Guide Advanced Guide gt Appendix gt Sharing the Printer on a Network gt Restrictions on Printer Sharing P415 Restrictions on Printer Sharing If you are using the XPS printer driver replace Canon IJ Status Monitor with Canon IJ XPS Status Monitor when reading this information These are restrictions that apply when you are using a printer in a network environment Check the restrictions for the environment you are using When You Are Sharing a Printer in a Network e Aprint completion message may be displayed To disable the message to display follow the procedure below e If you are using Windows 7 In the Devices and Printers window of the client select the printer from Printers and Faxes and open the displayed Print server properties Uncheck Show information notifications for network printers on the Advanced tab and then restart the computer e If you are using Window
357. using paper abrasion Reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again 1 Open the printer driver setup window gt Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window a Click Here Printer Driver Before clicking here to open the printer driver setup window quit the running application software Paper Is Smudged Printed Surface Is Scratched Page 404 of 468 pages 2 On the Main sheet select Manual for Color Intensity and then click Set 3 Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity e Check 6 Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink Resize your original document in your application software Printing Area e Check 7 Is the Paper Feed Roller dirty Clean the Paper Feed Roller Routine Maintenance E8 Note Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller so perform this procedure only when necessary e Check 8 Is the inside of the printer dirty When performing duplex printing the inside of the printer may become stained with ink causing the printout to become smudged Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the printer Cleaning Inside the Printer ES Note To prevent the inside of the printer from stains set the paper size correctly e Check 9 Set Ink Drying Wait Time l
358. ute Borderless Printing Page 260 of 468 pages 3 Check the paper size Check the Page Size list When you want to change select another page size from the list The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing 4 Adjust the amount of extension from the paper If necessary adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper and moving the slider to the left decreases the amount It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases if Q H P important When you set the slider at the rightmost position the back side of the paper may become smudged 5 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the data is printed without any margins on the paper P important When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing When High Resolution Paper T Shirt Transfers or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab you cannot perform borderless printing When Borderless is selected the Printer Paper Size Duplex Printing Staple Side settings and the Stamp Background Stamp button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable Depending on the type of the media used during borderless printing the print quality may deteriorate at the top
359. utomatically Be sure to load paper in the Rear Tray 3 Open the Paper Output Tray gently and extend the Output Tray Extension to open gt Important If the Inner Cover is open close it 4 Open the printer driver setup window See Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window Aligning the Print Head Page 60 of 468 pages 5 Adjust the print head position 1 Click the Maintenance tab 2 Click Print Head Alignment aasman aiaia Bonon Pane Oeareg RVers Pape muton oo prere poe ben meam wet Des Deero Gai G but rostm the cowed be savet e rie ergs eee ngr comming r r werg Pvt teed gren Powe OF wi Females pred end hye are fe Tare te pris d ron 3 Confirm the message and click Align Print Head Seat Peat end Abgweret Matey theme pros taai ding rame Seco De hyrer rva prong pet he omte macy koren he cathe maue De pome ar lead one shest of Af oriana wee Mane Prose Paper ADP ITDnac Se m bay art siat gs Pad Haad Pra cunts of msome prt head airmen ae aa nidio cafa marus omt Meat iganen amp omcaunly g Pe pant waat Ta can om mas naad saree ha Carat Vet t Gao Srg oe Ae Martror ib of the prer deem tert A Sonti marualy anc ieh Send Then ty agar Ta pre ma danh Be casted tating ck Pa Abprrnent Vii GD The print head alignment sheet will be printed and the print head position will be adjusted automatically Do not perform any other operations until the printer completes the pr
360. with a soft dry cloth taking care not to scratch the plate The Disc Tray may become dirty if software other than CD LabelPrint or Easy PhotoPrint EX is used Always use the supplied 3 15 inches 8 cm Disc Adapter when printing on 3 15 inches 8 cm printable discs Always close the Inner Cover after printing on printable discs To keep the print quality at an optimal level it is recommended to stop printing discs once every ten discs when printing more than ten discs continuously To stop the printing operation detach the Disc Tray from the printer then close the Inner Cover After approximately three minutes have elapsed open the Inner Cover attach the Disc Tray to the printer then resume printing Page top Attaching Removing the Disc Tray Page 337 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt About Disc Label Printing gt Printing a Disc Label gt Attaching Removing the Disc Tray D013 Attaching Removing the Disc Tray Attaching the Disc Tray P important Do not attach the Disc Tray until the message asking you to load the printable disc is displayed Doing so can damage the printer 1 Open the Paper Output Tray A 2 Make sure that the message asking you to load the printable disc is displayed then open the Inner Cover B A B 3 Place the printable disc on the Disc Tray P important Make sure that there is no dirt on the Disc Tray before placing a printable disc on the Disc Tray
361. x on the Main tab is checked Monochrome Effects appears grayed out and is unavailable Page top Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors Page 318 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with Other Application Software gt Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data gt Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors P023 Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors This feature is unavailable when the XPS printer driver is used The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human skin color natural By using this function you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used Settings and then choosing Additional Features 1 Open the printer driver setup window 2 Set Vivid Photo Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab l rage Opterizer Phgto Optimizer PRO Fooly Throughout Page ca Photo Noise Reduction Norra Pan Paper Leter 85x11 215 9279 4em 3 Complete the setup Click OK When you execute print the image will be printed with vivid colors Page top Smoothing Jagged Outlines Page 319 of 468 pages Advanced Gttels Advanced Guide gt P
362. y You can print with different settings in Media Type suitable for each type of loaded paper m Use the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel printing Tip Never press the ON button If you press the ON button while printing is in progress the print data sent from the computer queues in the printer and you may not be able to continue to print Press the RESUME CANCEL button to cancel printing Note If you cannot cancel printing by pressing the RESUME CANCEL button while printing from a computer open the printer driver setup window to delete the unnecessary print jobs from the printer status monitor m Does the printer need to be handled with care when using or transporting Tip Do not use or transport the printer vertically or slanted If the printer is used or transported vertically or slanted the printer may become damaged or ink may leak from the printer Tips on How to Use Your Printer Page 69 of 468 pages Be sure not to use or transport the printer vertically or slanted Tip Do not place any object on the Top Cover Do not place any object on the Top Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Top Cover is opened and cause the printer to malfunction Also place the printer where objects will not fall on it gt S Tip Carefully choose the area to place the printer Gly v Place the printer at least 5 91 inches 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as fluorescent lamps I
363. y Settings dialog box select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print Settings dialog box To display the Print Settings dialog box click Advanced Printing 3 Click Print ES Note See Help for details on the Print Settings screen Page top Page 144 of 468 pages Printing Premium Content Page 145 of 468 pages AJAS Gutels Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Printing Premium Content A180 Easy PhotoPrint EX Printing Premium Content Use Easy PhotoPrint EX to edit and print content downloaded from the Canon website P important This function is supported under Windows XP or later Keep these points in mind when using PREMIUM Contents Print To print with Easy PhotoPrint EX you need to download and install the exclusive content See Downloading Premium Content for details on how to download content You may only use the content downloaded or printed for personal purposes You may not use the content for commercial purposes Steps 1 Starting Easy PhotoPrint EX 2 Selecting the Paper and Layout 3 Selecting a Photo 4 Editing 5 Printing Try This Correcting and Enhancing Photos Creating Still Images from Videos Downloading Images fr
364. y be sae peme ey ah Cones per bea boms samade come lary 2 Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter sized plain paper are loaded in the Cassette Follow the procedure from 3 in step 5 in Cleaning the Print Head to clean the Print Head 90 A Page top Cleaning the Print Head Page 55 of 468 pages Basic Guide Contents gt Routine Maintenance gt When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect gt Cleaning the Print Head C096 m Cleaning the Print Head Clean the Print Head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition Cleaning the Print Head consumes ink so clean the Print Head only when necessary You need to prepare a sheet of A4 or Letter sized plain paper ES Note Cleaning the Print Head without a computer You can also clean the Print Head print head nozzles of all ink colors from the printer itself using the RESUME CANCEL button 1 Make sure that the power is turned on 2 Hold down the RESUME CANCEL button until the POWER lamp flashes green once then release it immediately The printer starts cleaning the Print Head When the POWER lamp is lit green after flashing the cleaning will be completed Print the nozzle check pattern to check the print head condition after cleaning See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern If you click Cleaning on the Pattern Check
365. y with a new one For details see Tips on How to Use Your Printer 1 Make sure that the power is turned on and open the Paper Output Tray gently 2 Open the Top Cover The Print Head Holder moves to the replacement position Caution Replacing an Ink Tank Page 43 of 468 pages Do not hold the Print Head Holder to stop or move it forcibly Do not touch the Print Head Holder until it stops completely gt Important Do not place any object on the Top Cover It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Top Cover is opened and cause the printer to malfunction Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the printer If the Top Cover is left open for more than 10 minutes the Print Head Holder moves to the right In this case close and reopen the Top Cover Do not open the Inner Cover A when replacing the ink tank If the Inner Cover A is open after replacing the ink tank be sure to close it 3 Remove the ink tank with the lamp flashing fast Push the tab B and lift the ink tank to remove Do no touch the Print Head Lock Lever C gt Important Handle the ink tank carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables E8 Note Do not remove two or more ink tanks at the same time Be sure to replace ink tanks one by one when replacing two or more ink tanks For d
366. yed on the left and the image after the correction is displayed on the right of the window Compare Captured Frames Before Sort by Time Displays the captured still images in the order of the time code Note See Creating Still Images from Videos for details on how to create still images from videos Page top Page 190 of 468 pages Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites Page 191 of 468 pages Advanced Guide Advanced Guide gt Printing from a Computer gt Printing with the Bundled Application Software gt Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites A170 Downloading Images from Photo Sharing Sites You can search for images on photo sharing sites on the Internet and download the images you want to print P important Internet connection is required to use this function Internet connection fees apply For the purpose of using this function your product name OS information regional information and information that you have clicked ce Import photos from photo sharing sites will be collected and sent to Canon This function may not be available in some regions It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder except for personal use use within the home or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright Additionally reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on portrait rights You may b

Lenovo 36984MU Laptop User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents